Skip to main content

Full text of "Life-history and habits of the salmon, sea-trout, trout, and other freshwater fish"

See other formats


SALMON,    SEA-TROUT,    TROUT 

AND    OTHER    FRESHWATER    FISH 


AGENTS 

AMERICA    .     .     THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY 

64  &  66  FIFTH  AVENUE,  NEW  YORK 

AUSTRALASIA     THE  OXFORD  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

205  FLINDERS  LANE,  MELBOURNE 

CANADA     .     .     THE  MACMILLAN  COMPANY  OF  CANADA,  LTD. 

ST.   MARTIN'S  HOUSE,  70  BOND  STREET,  TORONTO 

INDIA    .     .     .     MACMILLAN  &  COMPANY,  LTD. 

MACMILLAN  BUILDING,  BOMBAY 

309  Bow  BAZAAR  STREET.  CALCUTTA 


LIFE-HISTORY  AND  HABITS 

OF  THE  SALMON 

SEA-TROUT,    TROUT,    AND 
OTHER    FRESHWATER    FISH 


BY 

P.  D.   MALLOCH 


LONDON 
ADAM    AND    CHARLES    BLACK 


Eirsl  Edition,  published  January  1910. 
Second  Edition,  published  May  1912. 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION 

WHEN  I  published  the  first  edition  of  this  work,  less  than  two  years 
ago,  little  did  I  think  the  publishers  would  call  upon  me  to  issue  a 
second  within  so  short  a  period.  It  is  most  gratifying,  indeed,  to  me 
to  know  that  my  endeavours  to  give  reliable  information  about  the 
"  Life-  History  of  the  Salmon'  have  been  so  well  received.  The 
press  notices  and  the  private  letters  I  have  received  from  all  parts  of 
the  world  have  greatly  cheered  and  encouraged  me  in  this  work,  and 
I  take  this  opportunity  of  thanking  all  for  their  favourable  comments. 
During  last  year  I  devoted  what  spare  time  I  had  to  the  study  of 
scales  from  fish  which  had  returned  a  second  time  from  the  sea,  the 
results  of  which  are  embodied  in  this  edition. 
There  are  thirty-five  new  illustrations  added. 

P.   D.   MALLOCH. 

PERTH,  January  1912. 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION 

FISH  and  their  ways  have  at  all  times  engaged  the  attention  of  the 
writer,  and  the  outcome  of  these  studies  has  been  the  production 
of  this  volume.  Within  its  pages  he  has  endeavoured  to  clear  up 
many  points  relative  to  the  history  of  salmon  and  trout  which  have 
until  lately  remained  a  mystery.  So  many  unsatisfactory  theories 
have  been  advanced,  that  he  determined  to  take  full  advantage  of 
his  position  as  Manager  of  the  Tay  Salmon  Fisheries  Co.,  Ltd.,  and 
do  all  in  his  power  to  investigate  and  further  our  knowledge  regard- 
ing this  most  interesting  branch  of  Natural  History.  With  this  end 
in  view,  the  marking  of  smolts  on  their  way  to  the  sea,  and  their 
recapture  afterwards,  have  been  extensively  carried-  on,  and  their 
weight,  date  of  capture,  and  the  particular  run  to  which  they  be- 
longed, have  been  carefully  recorded. 

Hitherto  it  was  believed  that  salmon  smolts  returned  as  grilse 
the  same  year  as  they  went  down  to  the  sea,  but  a  study  of  the  smolt 
does  not  bear  this  out.  Again,  the  writer  shows  that  the  large 
Spring  salmon,  the  small  Spring  salmon,  and  also  the  "  Summer 
Run,"  are  on  their  first  return  from  the  sea,  and  not  from  the  kelt 
grilse  as  many  supposed.  Evidence  is  also  given  that  the  so-called 
salmon  bull-trout  is  not  a  trout,  but  a  true  salmon  which  has  spawned, 
and  consequently  has  become  altered  in  appearance  and  white  in  the 
flesh.  From  a  study  of  the  scales  the  age  of  a  fish  can  be  arrived 


VI 1 


Vlll 


Preface   to   First   Edition 


at,  and  with  the  help  of  the  numerous  illustrations  the  reader  will  be 
able  to  refer  any  fish  to  the  particular  run  to  which  it  belongs,  to 
ascertain  its  weight  and  age,  and  how  often  it  has  returned  to  fresh 
water.  Although  about  sixty  illustrations  of  scales  are  given, 
thousands  had  to  be  collected  at  all  seasons  and  examined  carefully, 
so  that  a  definite  conclusion  could  be  arrived  at.  The  illustrations 
are  from  photographs  which,  with  one  or  two  exceptions,  were  taken 
by  the  author  from  selected  specimens. 

To  Mr.  Charles  Baker,  High  Holborn,  London,  he  is  indebted 
for  enlarging  the  photographs  of  the  scales;  to  the  Swantype  Co., 
for  the  blocks  from  which  the  illustrations  are  taken  ;  and  to  the 
printers,  Messrs.  R.  &  R.  Clark,  who  have  carried  out  the  work  to 
his  entire  satisfaction. 

P.    D.    MALLOCH. 

PERTH,  December  1909. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

THE  SALMON  .                            .                          . , .  .                            .            i 

SEA-TROUT      ....  153 

HABITS  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  BROWN  TROUT  .                      187 

LOCH  LEVEN  TROUT  .  .228 

THE  GRAYLING  239 

THE  CHAR      .  .242 

THE  PIKE        .              .                                         .  .247 

THE  PERCH    .  .        250 

THE  TENCH    .  .                                                   253 

THE  STICKLEBACK       .                            .  2^5 

THE  MINNOW               .  .257 

THE  COMMON  EEL      .              .  .              .        259 

RAINBOW  TROUT          .  .264 

MONSTROSITIES             .  269 

HYBRIDS          .              .                                         .  .                            .276 

VENDACE         ...  .                                         .277 

GWYNIAD         ......  .279 

THE  POWAN  OF  LOCH  LOMOND           .  .                                                 281 

THE  FLOUNDER           ...  .              .        284 

ALLIS  SHAD    ...                             .  .                             .288 

THE  LOACH                  ...                             .  .                             .              .        291 

THE  LAMPREY             .  ...        292 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

FIG.  PAGE 

1.  Alevins  ......  .  .  i 

2.  Parr,  life  size,  one  year  old.       1st  April  1903        .  .  .  .  .2 

3.  Salmon  Parr,  life  size.      River  Dochart,  September  1906  .  .  .3 

4.  Life-size  Parr,  one  year  old.      Parr,  two  years  old.      Smolt,  two  years.      April  1905  4 

5.  Real   Smolts,   life  size,  with  their  silvery  coat  complete,  on  their  way  to  the  sea. 

ist  May  1905  ........  5 

6.  Life-size  Smolt.      ist  May  1905  .  .  .  .  .  .6 

7.  Smolts,  life  size,  with  the  scales  taken   off,   showing  the   parr  bands  and  spots  of 

the  parr.      ist  May  1905        .......          7 

8.  Smolts    confined    until   6th   June,   with   the    silver  scales  taken   off,   showing  the 

parr  bands  below       ........          8 

9.  Life-size  Parr  and  Trout,  showing  the  difference  between  the  two  .  .          9 

10.  Loch  Leven  Trout  and  Salmon  Smolt,  both  with  their  silvery  coat.      June  1906   .         10 

11.  Stormontfield  Ponds  on  the  Tay,  erected  1852    .  .  .  .  .15 

12.  Smolt,  showing  how  ring  is  fastened  in  dorsal  fin  .  .  .  .16 

13.  Real  Smolts,  life  size,  two  years  old.      Same  as  marked  1st  May  1905      .  .17 

14.  First   Marked   Grilse.      Marked    as   Smolt    May    1905.      Caught    ist  June    1906. 

Weight  2  Ibs.   1 5  oz.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .18 

15.  Mark  of  first  Grilse,  ist  June  1906          .  .  .  .  .  .18 

1 6.  Male  Grilse,  4^  Ibs.,  caught  26th  June  1906.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  .        19 

17.  Female  Grilse,  5!  Ibs.      Caught  4th  July  1906.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  .        20 

18.  Male  Grilse,  5  Ibs.      Tay,   1 5th  July  1907  .  .  .  .  .21 

19.  Marked  Grilse,  3^  Ibs.,  3rd  July  1906.      Smolt  marked  May  1905  .  .        22 

20.  Female  Grilse,  9  Ibs.      The  Tay,  ist  August  1906  .  .  .  .23 

21.  Male  Grilse,  14  Ibs.      The  Tay,  2oth  August  1902  .  .  .24 

22.  Male  Grilse,  10  Ibs.      The  Tay,  loth  August  1906  .  .  .  .26 

23.  Tay  Salmon,  9^  Ibs.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905,  caught  iSth  February  1907. 

First  return  from  the  sea        .  .  .  .  .  .  .27 

24.  Small  Spring  fish,  8|  Ibs.      6th  April   1907  ...  .28 

25.  Small  Spring  fish,   13  Ibs.      3oth  April  1907         .  .  .  .  .30 

xi 


Xll 


Illustrations 


FIG.  PAGE 

26.  Autumn    Salmon,    iSi   Ibs.      Caught    iSth   July    1907.      Marked    as    Smolt    May 

1905.      First  return  from  the  sea        .  .  .  .  .  .31 

27.  Mark  of  iS^-lb.  Salmon  shown,  caught  iSth  July  1907   .  .  .  .32 

28.  Male  Salmon,  27  Ibs.      9th  August  1907.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905.      Largest 

caught  up  till  this  date.      First  return  from  the  sea      .  .  .  -33 

29.  Large   Spring   Salmon,    15    Ibs.      First   caught,  7th   February  1908.      Marked  as 

Smolt  May  1905.      First  return  from  the  sea  .  .  .  .34 

30.  Showing    mark    of    15-lb.    Spring    Salmon.      First    caught,    7th    February    1908. 

Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  .  .  .  .  .  -35 

31.  i3-lb.  marked  Salmon.      Caught  ijth  February  1908.      Marked  as  Smolt  1905    .        36 

32.  35-lb.    marked    Salmon.      Caught    at   Almond   mouth,   on  the  Tay,   3ist    March 

1908.      Marked  as   Smolt,   about    i^  oz.,    May  1905,   having  been  in  the  sea 
nearly  three  years.      Age  five  years     .  .  .  .  .  -37 

33.  Male  Salmon,  27  Ibs.      February  1904.      First  return  from  the  sea  .  .        38 

34.  Tay  Female  Salmon,  30  Ibs.      2nd  August  1907.      First  return  from  the  sea         .        39 

35.  Tay  Male  Salmon,  40  Ibs.      March  1905.      First  return  from  the  sea        .  .        40 

36.  Tay  Female  Salmon,  40  Ibs.      First  return  from  the  sea  .  .  .40 

37.  Showing   mark  of  first   small   Spring  fish,    9!   Ibs.,   caught  iSth  February  1907. 

Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  .  .  .  .  .  -4' 

38.  7-lb.  Female  Kelt  Grilse.      March  1903  .  .  .  .  .42 

39.  (i)    So-called    Tay    Bull-Trout,    30    Ibs.      Second    return    from    the    sea,    having 

spawned.      (2)    Salmon,    30   Ibs.      August    1905.      First  return  from   the   sea, 

has  not  spawned        .  .  ...  .  .  .  .43 

40.  7-lb.  Kelt,  small  Spring  fish.      March  1908  .  .  .  .  .44 

41.  Female    12-lb.    Kelt   Autumn    Salmon,    immediately  after   spawning.      The   Don, 

i  i  th  February  1 900  .  .  .  .  .  .  .45 

42.  Female  Salmon,  26^  Ibs.      Marked  as  a  Smolt  May  1905.      Caught  on  5th  July 

1909  .  ...  .47 

43.  Scale  of  26l-lb.  Salmon.      Marked  as  a  Smolt  May  1905.      Caught  5th  July  1909        48 

44.  Female  Salmon  on  spawning-bed,  turning  up  the  gravel  with  her  tail.      November 

1904  53 

45.  Salmon  Spawning-Bed  on  the  Tay           .  .               .               .               .  .54 

46.  Salmon  Spawning-Bed  (enlarged)             .  .               .              .               .  .54 

47.  Showing    Salmon-Beds    diverting   the  water  where  the   gravel    is  raised,  River 

Duart  More,  Sutherland          .  .  .  .  .  .  -55 

48.  Salmon,  Male  and  Female.      Female  turned  on  her  side,  turning  up  the  gravel 

with  her  tail  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .56 

49.  Salmon  Spawning,  Male  and  Female.      November  1904  .  .  -57 

50.  Showing  Salmon  Spawning-Beds  on  River  Almond.      November  1905  .  .        58 

51.  25-lb.  Female  Baggot  or  Rawner.      The  Don,   i6th  February  1899  .  .        60 


Illustrations 


Xlll 

FIG.  PAGE 

52.  The  same  Rawner,  showing  the  ova        .             ".              .               .               .  .60 

53.  Scale  of  Parr.      April  1905          .....  .66 

54.  Scale  of  Parr.      i  oz.      August  1904       .               .               .               .              .  .66 

55.  Scale  of  Parr.      1 1  oz.      Stormontfield  Ponds.      igth  March   1908  .        66 

56.  Scale  of  Smolt.      i  *•  oz.     April  1905       .              .              .              .              .  .66 

57.  Scale  of  Grilse.      i^lbs.      4th  May  1907.      North  Esk  .               .               .  -67 

58.  Scale  of  Grilse.      2^  Ibs.      4th  May  1906.      North  Esk  ...  67 

59.  Scale  of  Grilse.      3  Ibs.      ist  June  1905                 .               .               .               .  .68 

60.  Scale  of  Grilse.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905.      Caught  26th  June  1906.      5!  Ibs.        68 

61.  Scale  of  Grilse.      7  Ibs.      28th  July  1906.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  .        69 

62.  Scale  of  Grilse.      10  Ibs.      8th  August  1906.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  .        69 

63.  Scale  of  Grilse.      ic4  Ibs.      iSth  August  1906.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905  70 

64.  Scale  of  Autumn  Salmon.      7  Ibs.      2oth  July  1907          .               .               .  .71 

65.  Scale  of  Small  Spring  Salmon.      10  Ibs.      igth  February  1907    .               .  .72 

66.  Scale    of  Small    Spring    Salmon.      9!    Ibs.      i8th    February    1907.     .Marked  as 

Smolt  May  1905        ........        74 

67.  Scale  of  Small   Spring  Salmon.      IO.L  Ibs.      iith  April  1907.      Marked  as  Smolt 

May  1905     .  75 

68.  Scale  of  Small  Spring  Salmon.      6  Ibs.      8th  March  1907  .  .  -75 

69.  Scale  of  Small  Spring  Salmon.      10^  Ibs.      1 5th  March  1907       .  .  .76 

70.  Scale  of  Summer  Salmon.      12},  Ibs.     6th  May  1907.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905        77 

71.  Scale  of  Summer  Salmon.     11  Ibs.     I4th  June  1907.     Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905        77 

72.  Scale   of  Autumn    Salmon.      Marked    as    Smolt    May    1905.      Caught    1 8th   July 

1907.      i  S^  Ibs.          ........        78 

73.  Scale  of  Large  Summer  Salmon.      27  Ibs.      27th  June  1907         .  .  .79 

74.  Scale  of  Autumn  Salmon.      18^  Ibs.      3rd  August  1907.      Marked  as  Smolt  May 

1905  .  79 

75.  Scale  of  Autumn  Salmon.       18  Ibs.      2Oth  August  1907.      Marked  as  Smolt  May 

1905  ......  .80 

76.  Scale  of  Autumn  Salmon.      iSlbs.      2Oth  August  1907   .  .  .  .80 

77.  Scale  of  Autumn   Salmon.      15   Ibs.      igih   September    1907.      Caught   with   fly 

by  M.  T.  Martin,  Esq.,  at  Stanley.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905        .  .        Si 

78.  Scale  of  14-lb.  Kelt.      27th  March  1906  .  .  .81 

79.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Salmon.      38^  Ibs.      I3th  February  1908  .  .        82 

50.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Salmon.      35  Ibs.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905.      Caught 

3ist  March  1908       .  .  .  .  .  .  .  83 

51.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Salmon.      18  Ibs.      23rd  March  1908.      Marked  as  Smolt 

May  1905.      Second  return  from  the  sea          .  .  .  .  .83 

82.    14-lb.   Female    Kelt,   immediately  after   spawning,  still   showing  the   dark  colour. 

24th  January  1907    .  .....        84 


Illustrations 


XIV 

FIG.  PAGE 

83.  12-lb.  Female  Kelt,  soon  after  having  spawned.      24th  January  1907      .  84 

84.  Scale  of  Kelt.       I4lbs.      2/th  March    ...  85 

85.  Scale  of  Large  Summer  Salmon.      40  Ibs.      i5th  May  1906       .  .          86 

86.  Scale  of  Large  Summer  Salmon.      57^  Ibs.      24th  May  1907     .               .  .87 

87.  Scale    of  Large    Autumn    Salmon.      Marked    ic4-lb.    Kelt,     i6th    March  1906. 

Caught  clean,  27  Ibs.,  8th  August  1907  .  .  .  .88 

88.  Scale   of   Large    Summer   Salmon.      Marked   as   Kelt,    16   Ibs.,    February    1904. 

Caught  1 8th  June  1905,  34  Ibs.  .  .  ...  89 

89.  Scale  of  Large  Summer  Salmon.      40  Ibs.      26th  June  1907        .  .  .90 

90.  Scale    of   Large    Autumn    Salmon.      47    Ibs.      August    1906.      Shannon.      First 

return  from  the  sea   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .91 

91.  Scale   of  Large  Autumn   Salmon.      50   Ibs.       loth   August    1907.      First   return 

from  the  sea                .               .  .                .               .               .               .               .92 

92.  Scale  of  Large  Autumn  Salmon.  40  Ibs.     August  1906.     First  return  from  the  sea          93 

93.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Salmon.  65  Ibs.      6th  June  1907.      Norway       .                .           94 

94.  Scale  of  Large  Autumn  Salmon.  Marked  as  Kelt,  II  Ibs.,  I2th  February  1906. 

Caught  clean,  26  Ibs.,  loth  July  1907  .  .  .  .  -95 

95.  Scale   of   Large    Summer   Salmon.      61    Ibs.      i3th    July    1902.       Tay.       First 

return  from  the  sea    ........  96 

96.  Scale  of  Male  Salmon.      14  Ibs.      2oth  August  1911  .  -97 

97.  Scale  of  Small  Spring  Fish.      3^  Ibs.      5th  February  1911          .  .          97 

98.  i4-lb.  Male  Salmon.      2oth  August  1911.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  .          98 

99.  Scale  of  Small  Spring  Fish.      7!  Ibs.      22nd  February  1911        .  .  .99 

100.  Scale  of  2O-lb.  Salmon.      2oth  August  1911.      Third  return  from  the  sea  .         100 

101.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Salmon.      35  Ibs.      3rd  April  1911.      Second  return  from 

the  sea  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .100 

1 02.  Scale  of  26-lb.  Salmon.      loth  July  1907.     Second  return  from  the  sea  .  101 

103.  Scale  of  ig-lb.  Salmon.      8th  March.      Second  return  from  the  sea          .  .  101 

104.  Scale  of  24-lb.  Salmon.      2oth  June  1911.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  102 

105.  Scale  of  7-lb.  Salmon.      2oth  July  1907.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  .  103 

1 06.  Scale  of  24-lb.  Salmon.      i  ith  April  1911.      Second  return  from  the  sea  103 

107.  Scale  of  13-lb.  Salmon.      iith  April   1911.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  104 

108.  Scale  of  2O-lb.  Salmon.      iith  April  1911.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  104 

109.  Scale  of  35-lb.  Salmon.      2Oth  August   1910.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  105 
i  10.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Female  Salmon.      22  Ibs.      Norway,  9th  June  1910  .  107 
i  i  i.  Scale  of  Female  Salmon.     32  Ibs.     i2th  June  1910.     Second  return  from  the  sea  108 

112.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Female  Salmon.      23  Ibs.      26th  June  1910  .  .  108 

113.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Female  Salmon.      29  Ibs.      28th  June  1910          .               .  109 
i  14.  Scale  of  Male  Salmon.      36  Ibs.      29th  June  1910.      Second  return  from  the  sea  i  10 
115.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Male  Salmon.      3Oth  June  1910                .               .               .  110 


Illustrations 


XV 


FIG.  PAGE 

116.  Scale  of  Female  Salmon.      35  Ibs.      6th  July  1910.      Third  return  from  the  sea  ill 

i  17.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Female  Salmon.      i  ith  July   1910  .112 

i  1 8.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Male  Salmon.      9th  June    1910   .  .  .  .         112 

119.  Scale   of  Male   Salmon   >  Xamsen).      14   Ibs.      7th   June    1911.       Second   return 

from  the  sea  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .113 

120.  Scale  of  Female  Salmon  (Xamsen).      35  Ibs.      I2th  May  1911.      Second   return 

from  the  sea  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .114 

121.  Scale   of  Male   Salmon  (Xamsen).      27  Ibs.       I2th   June    [911.      Second   return 

from  the  sea  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .115 

122.  Scale  of  Female  Salmon  (Xamsen).      38  Ibs.      I7th  June   191  i.      Second  return 

from  the  sea                .               .               .               .               .               .               .  i  1 6 

123.  Scale  of  Large  Spring  Male  Salmon  (Xamsen).      36  Ibs.      I7th  June  1911  i  16 

124.  Scale  of  Large  Salmon.      62  Ibs.             .               .               .               .               .  .117 

125.  Scale  of  Tyee  Salmon  (Campbell  Riveri.      35  Ibs.      2Oth  August   1910  .  118 

126.  Scale  of  Choe  Salmon  (Vancouver).      14  Ibs.      4th  September  1910       .  .         119 

127.  7i-lb.  Salmon,  caught  in  the  Tay,  2ist  June  1870.      Length,  52  in.;  girth,  32  in.        121 

128.  57^-lb.    Male   Salmon.      4   ft.    5^   in.   long  ;   2  ft.   4^   in.   girth.      The  Tay,  24th 

May  1907      ....... 

129.  52-lb.  Male  Salmon.      The  Tay,  June  1907.      First  return  from  the  sea 

130.  53-lb.    Male   Salmon,   caught  with   fly  by  the   late   Lord  Blythswopd.      The  Tay, 

October         .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .124 

131.  55-lb.  Male  Salmon,  caught  with  prawn  by  Captain  Goodwin.      October  1904    .         124 

132.  44-lb.  Male  Shannon  Salmon.      May  1902         .  .               .               .               .125 

133.  47-lb.  Male  Salmon,  caught  with  fly  by  the  late  Lord  Blythswood.      October  1903         126 

134.  Head  of  a  63-!!).  Male  Salmon,  caught  by  the  rod  on  the  Tay,  October  1907      .         127 

135.  jS-lb.  Tay  Male  Salmon.      June  .               .               .               .               .               .128 

136.  47-lb.  Tay  Male  Salmon,  caught  by  the  late  Lord  Cairns  .               .               .129 

137.  6-oz.    Smolt,    confined    in    Bertha    Loch    six    months    after   becoming   a    smolt. 

September  1905         ......  .130 

138.  4-02.    Smolt,    confined    in    Bertha    Loch    five    months    after   becoming    a   smolt. 

August  1907  ......  131 

139.  S-oz.    large   Smolt,    two  years   old,  confined  in  Stormontfield    Ponds  a  year  after 

becoming  a  smolt.      Also  ii  oz.  Smolt,  two  years  old  .  .  .132 

140.  1 2-oz.  Smolt,  confined  one  year  after  becoming  a  Smolt.      May  1905     .  133 

141.  8-oz.  Smolt,  confined   in    Bertha   Loch  fourteen   months  after  becoming  a  smolt. 

ist  July  1905  .  .134 

142.  1 2-oz.  Smolt,  confined   in    Bertha  Loch  fifteen  months   after  becoming   a   smolt. 

July  1904     .  .  135 

143.  (i)   8-oz.    Loch    Dupplin    Trout.      (2)    12-oz.    Smolt,   confined   in   Loch   Dupplin 

sixteen  months  after  becoming  a  smolt.      August   1904  .  .  .136 


XVI 


Illustrations 


FIG.  PAGE 

144.  2-lb.  Smolt,  confined  in  reservoir  two  years  after  becoming  a  smolt  .  .137 

145.  Live  Salmon  with  disease,  under  shade  of  a  tree.      December  1903  .  .144 

146.  iS-lb.  Female  Salmon,  unspawned.      November  1900    .            .   .  .  .145 

147.  Two    Male   4O-lb.    Salmon,   unspawned,    found   together   as   shown,  cast  up   on 

the  beach.      December  1906  .  .  .  .  .  .146 

148.  i6-lb.  Female  Salmon,  partly  spawned,  almost  dead.      November  1906  .         147 

149.  Showing  fungus  developed  after  the  fish  was  dead  for  a  considerable  time  .        148 

150.  7-lb.  Male  Grilse,  showing  fungus  partly  developed  on  head.      December  1905  .         149 

151.  2o-lb.  Female,  showing  fungus  fully  developed  on  head.      December  1904  .         150 

152.  igi-lb.  Sea-Trout.      Largest  ever  caught  in  the  Tay.      June  1908  .  .         154 

153.  Salmon,  showing  number  of  scales  from  adipose  fin  to  lateral  line  to  be  ten         .         155 

154.  Sea-Trout,  showing  scales  from  the  adipose  fin  to  the  lateral  line  .  .156 

155.  Life-size  Yellow-fin  Smolt  of  the  Sea-Trout,      ist  May  1905        .  .  .157 

156.  Life-size  Yellow-fin  Smolts  of  Sea-Trout,  going  to  sea.     River  Tay.     ist  May  1905        158 

157.  i-lb.  \Yhitling.      First  return  from  the  sea.      July  1900  .  .  .  .159 

158.  12-oz.   Sea-Trout,    confined    in    Bertha   Loch   one   year  after  becoming  a   smolt. 

June  1906     .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .160 

159.  i -Ib.  \Yhitling.      April  1904       .......         161 

160.  i^-lb.  Sea-Trout.      I5th  May  1904.      Second  return  from  the  sea  .  .162 

161.  2^-lb.  Sea-Trout,      ist  July  1904  .  .  .  .  .  .162 

162.  2-lb.  Sea-Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay  5th  February  1907  .  .  .  .163 

163.  Scale  of  Yellow-fin.      i^  oz.      27th  April  1907  .  .  .        164 

164.  Scale  of  Sea-Trout.      i  Ib.      Caught  at  sea,  3ist  July  1907  .  .         164 

165.  Scale  of  Sea-Trout,      gibs.      Coquet,  25th  July  1907    ....         165 

1 66.  i8^-lb.  Sea-Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay  June  1900  .  .  .  .166 

167.  i4-lb.  Tay  Sea-Trout.      I4th  August  1906          .  .  .  .167 

1 68.  7-lb.  Sea-Trout,  from  the  Coquet,  Northumberland.      25th  July  1907      .  .168 

169.  Sea-Trout  from  the  Coquet,  average  7  Ibs.      25th  July  1907        .  .  .169 

170.  Supposed  by  fishermen  on  the  Coquet  to  be  a  cross   between   Salmon  and  Sea- 

Trout.      9  Ibs.      9th  July  1907  .  .  .  .  .  .170 

171.  (i)  7-lb.  Grilse.      (2)  7-lb.  Sea-Trout.      7th  July  1906.      The  Tay  .  .        171 

172.  8-lb.  Sea-Trout.      The  Tay.      igth  August  1907  ....         172 
I73-    (0  8-lb.  Sea-Trout.      (2)  5-lb.  Grilse.      Tay.       ijth  July  1907    .  .  173 

174.  Different  types  of  Sea-Trout,  2  Ibs.  to  8  Ibs.      The  Tay.      August  1905  .         174 

175.  Different  types  of  Sea-Trout.      The  Tay.      August  1905  .  .  .175 

176.  Sea-Trout,  caught  with  fly  in  the  sea.      Scourie,  Sutherland.      July  1904  176 

177.  Heads  of  Sea-Trout.      July  1907  .  ....        177 

178.  5-lb.  Kelt  Sea-Trout,  from  the  River  Earn.      March  1901  .  .  .178 

179.  Gill  of  a  2o-lb.  Salmon  which  has  spawned  and  returned  as  a  clean  fish,  showing 

maggots  on  gill,  which  is  partly  eaten  away    .  .  .  .  i  So 


Illustrations 


XVll 


FIG.  PAGE 

1 80.    39-lb.  Female   Salmon  Bull-Trout.      Second  return  from  the  sea,  showing  spots. 

Caught  \vith  fly  by  Archibald  Coats,  Esq.,  3rd  September  1907            .               .  181 
iSr.   4o-lb.    Tay  Salmon.      First   return   from  the   sea,  not  having  spawned.      June 

1904               .........  182 

182.  42-lb.  Tay  Salmon.      Second  return  from  the  sea,  having  spawned  once                .  184 

183.  Male   Sea-Trout  or   Bull   Trout.      8  Ibs.      The  Till,   1st  August  1911.      Showing 

the  eye  above  the  level  of  the  mouth.     The  same  can  be  seen  in  the  smolt  stage  185 

184.  Female  Salmon.      16  Ibs.     The  Tay,  August   191  i.      Showing  the  eye  below  the 

level  of  the  mouth.      The  same  can  be  seen  in  the  smolt  stage              .               .  185 

185.  Female   Sea-Trout.      5  Ibs.      The   Tay,  August  1911.      Showing  the  eye  above 

the  level  of  the  mouth  .  .  .  .  .  .  .186 

1 86.  Brown  Trout.     2  Ibs.     August  1911.     Showing  the  eye  above  the  level  of  the  mouth  186 

187.  g-lb.  Durness  Trout,  Sutherland.      June  1908    .  188 

188.  Scale  of  Trout.       i  oz.      Loch  Leven.      ist  February  1906  189 

189.  Scale  of  Trout.      \  Ib.      Loch  Leven.      22nd  August  1906          .                               .  189 

190.  Scale  of  Trout.      ^  Ib.      Loch  Leven.      August  1906      .  189 

191.  Scale  of  1  rout.      i  ?T  Ibs.      Loch  Leven.      25th  July  1906             .               .               .  189 

192.  Scale  of  Trout.      2!  Ibs.      Loch  Leven.      251)1  July  1906             .               .  190 

193.  Male  and   Female  Trout  spawning.      Female  turned  on  her  side,  digging  up  the 

gravel  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .191 

194.  Trout  Spawning-Bed,  showing  the  gravel  heaped  up  .  .192 

195.  2-lb.  Brown  Trout  Kelt.      Loch  Dupplin.      March  1906                .               .  193 

196.  i-lb.  Loch  Slattell  Trout,  Sutherland.      July  1900  .  .  .  .194 

197.  Loch  Slattell  Trout,  Sutherland;  average  I  Ib.      July  1902         .  195 

198.  3-lb.  Loch  Crosophuill  Trout,  Sutherland.      June  1900  .               .               .  196 

199.  4-lb.  Loch  Crosophuill  Trout,  Sutherland.      June  1903  .               .               .  197 

200.  5-lb.  Loch  Crosophuill  Trout,  Sutherland.      June  1900.               .  198 

20 1.  1-11).  Loch  Gorm  Trout,  Scourie,  Sutherland.      July  1904  .  .  .199 

202.  2-lb.  Female  Tidal  Trout,  the  Estuary  of  the  Tay.      June  1902  .  200 

203.  Gillaroo  Trout,  Loch  Mulach-Corrie,  Sutherland              .  201 

204.  Loch    More    Trout,    average    2    Ibs.,    showing    condition    greatly    improved    by 

extended  feeding  area  of  loch.      Caithness,  July  1908                .               .               .  202 

205.  (i)  Brown  Trout  and  (2)  Sea-Trout,  i£  Ibs.  each,  from   the  Tay,  showing  the 

difference.      2oth  April  1908                .                               .                                              .  203 

206.  Loch  Scye,  Caithness.      July  1902          .              .                             .  204 

207.  Loch  Balligill  Trout,  Melvich,  Sutherland.      July  1901                  .                               .  205 

208.  Loch  Hundland  Trout,  Orkney.       fuly   1899       .....  206 

209.  f-lb.  German  Trout,  2^-  years  old           ......  207 

210.  ig.V-lb.  Loch  Killarney  Trout.      April  1907        .                             ...  208 
211     Scale  of  Trout.      19^  Ibs.      Killarney.      April  1907         ....  209 


XV  111 


Illustrations 


FIG.  PAGE 

212.  Scale  of  Trout.       13  Ibs.      Loch  Rannoch.      25th  June  1906      .  210 

213.  8-lb.  Loch  Ericht  Trout.      Caught  i4th  June  1902         .  .211 

214.  lo-lb.  Loch  Quoich  Trout,  Inverness-shire.      July  1900  .         212 

215.  y-lb.  Loch  Shin  Trout,  Sutherland.      June  1900               .                .  213 

216.  ij-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout.      June  1905            .                                              .  .214 

217.  14-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout.      June  1906            .  .214 

218.  ij-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout.      June  1903  .        215 

219.  i6-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout.      May  1903  216 

220.  i  i-lb.  Loch  Quoich  Trout.      July  1906  .         217 

221.  lo-lb.  Loch  Quoich  Trout.      July  1900                                                              .  218 

222.  i6-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout.      June  1903                            .                               .  .        219 

223.  15-lb.  Loch  Quoich  Trout.      June  1901                .               .                .               .  .220 

224.  8-lb.  Loch  Veyatie  Trout.      June  1906                 .                               .  221 

225.  7-lb.  River  Dean  Trout.      July  1900      .                .                               .  .222 

226.  6-lb.  Loch  Veyatie  Trout.      July  1906  .        223 

227.  ig-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout       .                                                              .  224 

228.  5-lb.  Loch  Crosophuill  Trout.      June  1902           .  .225 

229.  3-lb.  Male  Loch  Leven  Trout.      Loch  Leven,  June  1903              .               .  .229 

230.  2^-lb.  Loch  Leven  Trout.      Caught  in  Loch  Leven  June  1905    .               .  .        230 

231.  Loch  Leven  Trout  going  back,  |  lb.,  same  length  as  one  3  Ibs.      July  1908  .         232 

232.  Loch  Leven  Trout.      Largest,  4  years  and  4  months,  2  Ibs.      Second,  3  years  and 

4  months,   I  lb.      Third,  2  years  and  4  months,  ^  lb.      Loch  Leven,  July  1908        233 

233.  Loch  Leven  Trout.      Male,  2  Ibs.;   Female,   ji-lbs.      Loch  Leven,  June  1906  .        234 

234.  Basket  of  Loch  Leven  Trout.      Loch  Leven,  June  1906                .               .  237 

235.  2-lb.  Grayling,  from  the  River  Isla,  Perthshire.      October  1908  240 

236.  Grayling  from  the  Isla                .               .                .               .               .                .  .241 

237.  One  Brown  Trout,  two  Char,  ^  lb.  each.      Loch  Baden,  Sutherland,  July  1908  .        243 

238.  ^-lb.  Malloch's  Char.      Scourie,  Sutherlandshire  ....        244 

239.  2-lb.  Salmo  fontinalis.      The  Tay,  June  1904    .               .  245 

240.  1 8-lb.  Pike  (Esox  Indus).      River  Earn,  February  1900               .  248 

241.  2-lb.  Perch  (Perca fluviatilis).      River  Earn,  February  1900      .  .251 

242.  Sea  Lice.      Life  size     .                              ...  .252 

243.  5-lb.  Tench      ...  .254 

244.  The  Three-spined  Stickleback                                              .  .256 

245.  The  Minnow    ...  ...         257 

246.  The  Common  Eel  (Anguilla  fii/garis"),  6  Ibs.      Loch  Leven,  September  1900  .        260 

247.  Young  Eels.      July  1909            .               .               .               .               .               .  .261 

248.  7-lb.  Rainbow  Trout,  six  years  old,  caught  near  Perth.      September  1906  .         265 

249.  2-lb.  Rainbow  Trout,  four  years  old,  caught  at  Battleby  Loch.      August  1904  .         267 

250.  i-lb.  Rainbow  Trout,  two  years  old.      Loch  Dupplin.      May  1904            .  .         267 


Illustrations 


X  1  X 


FIG.  r.v;i-. 

251.  2-lb.  Deformed  Brown  Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay.      May  1904    .  268 

252.  .i-lb.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  Loch  Clashfern,  Sutherland.      July   1904  269 

253.  i  i-lb.  Deformed  Sea-Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay.      July  1907  270 

254.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay.      May  1904            .  270 

255.  1-lb.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  at  Tomdoun.      July  1904  271 

256.  5-lb.  Deformed  Grilse,  caught  in  the  Tay.      July  1905  .  271 

257.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  Clashfern,  Sutherland.      July  1904  .  272 

258.  2-lb.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  at  Scourie.      July  1904    .  273 

259.  ii-lb.  Deformed  Grayling,  caught  in  the  River  Isla.      October  1908       .  274 

260.  2-lb.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  Loch  Dupplin.      December  1907  275 

261.  i-lb.  Zebra,  cross  between  American  Char  and  Loch  Leven  Trout  276 

262.  j-lb.  Yendace.      Loch  Maben.      June  1904        .               .  278 

263.  Gwyniad,  caught  by  H.  Anderson,  Esq.      Ullswater.      1904  280 

264.  The  Powan       .               .  282 

265.  Head  of  Powan,  life  size  282 

266.  Daphnice,  life  size         .               .  283 

267.  The  Flounder                 .                               .               .  285 

268.  The  Flounder,  underside  .  .  .         286 

269.  Allis  Shad  289 

270.  Mouth  of  Shad                                              .  290 

271.  The  Loach       ...  291 

272.  Mouth  of  a  Lamprey,  showing  the  sucker  and  teeth.      Half  life  size  292 

273.  3-lb.  Lamprey,  30  inches  long,  caught  in  the  Tay.      July  1909                 .  293 

274.  Sea-Trout  marked  by  Lamprey  293 


THE    SALMON 
(Salmo  salar) 


THERE  are  so  many  mysteries  connected  with  the  life-history  of  the 
salmon  that  it  is  impossible  for  any  one  individual  to  solve  them  all  ; 
but  as  they  have  been  the  object  of  my  closest  study  for  over  thirty 
years,  I  trust  that  what  I  have  to  say  may  help  to  elucidate  some 
of  these  problems. 

The  ova  are  deposited  in  the  gravel  by  the  female  salmon 
during  the  autumn,  the  male  fish  covers  them  with  milt,  and  the  time 
required  for  hatching  is  Irom 
seventy  to  one  hundred  and 
twenty  days,  according  to  the 
temperature  of  the  water.  On 
emerging  from  the  eggs  the 
young  soon  begin  to  show  signs 
of  life,  and  wriggle  energetic- 
ally through  the  gravel  to  reach 
the  surface.  At  this  stage 
they  are  called  "  alevins,"  and 
hardly  yet  have  the  appearance 

.     r    .  "     r  ,      .  FIG.  i.— Alevins. 

01    fish,   lor   attached   to   their 

bodies,  a  little  behind  the  gill-opening,  is  a  large  bag,  the  yolk- 
or  umbilical-  sac.  containing  enough  nutriment  to  sustain  them 
for  several  weeks.  Before,  however,  this  is  entirely  absorbed, 
they  begin  to  search  for  natural  food  and  push  energetically  up- 
stream. In  a  short  time,  after  having  assumed  the  true  fish  shape, 


2  The   Salmon 

they  collect  in  shoals  and  are  called  fry.  By  autumn  they  are  from 
two  to  three  inches  long,  and  are  then  called  parr  (Fig.  2).  Very 
little  feeding  takes  place  after  the  end  of  September,  and  when  the 
cold  weather  sets  in,  the  parr  leave  the  shallow  water  to  take  up  their 
abode  under  stones,  where  they  remain  till  March  or  April,  and  almost 
entirely  cease  to  feed.  During  their  stay  in  winter-quarters  they 
become  very  black  and  fall  off  in  condition.  Often,  when  collecting 
larvae,  I  have  lifted  a  flat  stone  quietly  and  disclosed  to  view  three  or 
four  parr.  These  did  not  swim  away  at  first,  but  remained  motionless 
for  some  time,  apparently  in  a  dazed,  sleepy  condition.  When  the  water 


FIG.  2. — Parr,  life  size,  one  year  old.     ist  April  1903. 

becomes  warmer  their  winter  abode  is  forsaken  for  the  quieter  pools. 
Strange  to  say,  they  are  now  smaller  than  they  were  during  the  autumn. 
As  the  season  advances  they  become  lively,  frequent  shallow  water, 
forsake  large  rivers,  and  run  up  the  smaller  streams  as  far  as  the 
water  will  take  them.  They  increase  quickly  in  size,  and  by  autumn 
are  double  the  dimensions  they  were  in  the  previous  autumn.  The 
parr  is  now  a  very  handsome  fish  indeed.  Along  its  silvery  sides 
are  nine  bars,  with  black  and  red  spots,  and  the  tail  or  caudal  fin  is 
much  rounder  than  before.  During  winter,  again,  the  parr  retire 
to  their  old  haunts,  and  leave  them  in  March  and  begin  to  feed. 
About  the  first  week  in  April  a  great  change  takes  place  in  their 
appearance ;  the  silvery  smolt  dress  is  assumed,  and  the  dawn  of 


The   Salmon 


a  new  era   begins.      They  become  covered   with  silvery  scales,   their 
tails  lengthen  and  become   forked,  and   their   fins  are  enlarged.      This 


<u 

"a, 

C/3 


o 
o 


> 

2 


rt 
C/5 


change  is  quite  a  rapid  one,  the  fish  collecting  in  shoals  during  the 
process.  As  the  season  advances  the  true  smolt  stage  is  reached,  and 
the  migratory  period  begins.  In  large  rivers  the  descent  is  made  at 
any  convenient  time,  but  in  small  streams  they  can  only  descend  during 


The   Salmon 


small  spates.      Full  advantage,  however,  is  taken  of  every  little  freshet, 
and   on   arrival   in  ticlal  water  they  disappear  into  the  sea.      At  the 


IS-l 

O 

o 


rt 
<u 
>, 

O 


cj 

<u 


river-mouth   many  a  feathered    foe   awaits   their  coming,   Cormorants, 
sanders,    Red-breasted    Mergansers,    Red-throated     Divers,    etc., 


The   Salmon 


causing  great  destruction.      At  the  mouth  of  the   river  Grimersta  in 
the    island    of    Lewis,    I    have    seen    the    Red-breasted    Mergansers 


rt 
•f 


o 

o 

6 

u 


O 

ir. 


coming    and   going    all    day  long    in    a   continual    stream,    feeding   on 
the  smolts  as  they  entered   the  sea.      1   shot    several    returning   from 


The   Salmon 


their  forays   and    found   them    to    be    full   of  smolts.      As   the    smolts 

have  so  many  enemies  to 
evade,  too  little  attention 
paid  to  their  protection. 

would 


K 


IT. 


IS 

Our  young  grouse 
fare  badly  if  protected  in 
a  similarly  scanty  manner. 
In  some  rivers,  trout-anglers 
are  prohibited  from  fishing 
during  the  time  of  migration, 
but  during  the  remainder 
of  the  season  the  parr  are 
slaughtered  in  thousands.  I 
am  certain  that  in  the  Tay 
district  at  least  one  thousand 
parr  and  smolts  per  day,  from 
April  to  September,  find  their 
way  into  the  angler's  basket. 
This  is  a  gross  total  of  about 
157,000  for  six  months,  and 
if  four  per  cent  found  their 
way  back  as  salmon,  the  gain 
would  amount  to  6280.  Now 
this  alone  would  be  a  good 
yield  for  many  rivers ;  but 
if  we  take  into  consideration 
the  ever  -  increasing  number 
destroyed  by  birds,  the  victims 
of  seals,  coal-fish,  pollution, 
etc.,  we  find  that  the  destruc- 
tion and  loss  are  appalling. 
Sooner  or  later  those  having 

the  power  to  rectify  this  matter  will  waken  up,  and  at  no  distant  date 
our  rivers  will   be  teeming  with  salmon.     The  wheels  of  legislation 


The   Salmon  7 

regarding  the  improvement  of  our  fisheries  revolve  slowly,  however, 
for   year   after   year   the    Blue-books    contain    articles   suggesting  im- 


ri 

a, 


o 

CX, 


-3 
C3 


rt 


tfl 
C 


o  >> 

c  3 

CU  ^5 

"  « 


rt 
o 


O 

S 

C/3 


1^ 

O 


provement,  but,   like  the  hardy  annual,   these  are  forgotten  till   they 
reappear  the  next  season. 

I  have  wandered  away  from  my  subject,  and  now  return  to  follow 


8 


The   Salmon 


the  course  of  the  smolts.     This    has,   however,   to    a   certain   extent 


I 

>-, 

XH 

rt 


SJ3 
C 


O 

C 


« 

cj 


Co 


O 
O 


O 

c/3 

06 
6 


proved  to  be  an  impossible  task,  for  when  the  smolts  enter  the  sea  all 
traces  of  them  are  lost  for  a  while,  and  we  know  not  where  they  have 


The   Salmon 


o 
•f 


11 
O 

c 


I 

-5 

OJ 


bo 

O 


o 
H 


I0  The   Salmon 

gone.       Our    next   acquaintance  with   them   is  on  their  return   to  the 
rivers  as  grilse  and  salmon.      Smolts  go  clown  from  the  end  of  March 


<U 

C 


cS 
O 
u 


7) 

c 


rt 

in 


o 
ui 

H 


0) 

1-1 


o 


until  the  middle    of  June,   and  a  few  stray  ones  a    little    later.      No 
autumn  migration  takes  place.     This  has  been  proved  on  the  Tay  by 


The   Salmon  n 

netting  during  the  autumn  and  winter.  About  fourteen  months  after 
the  smolts  have  migrated,  a  run  of  small  grilse  appears.  The  first 
usually  arrive  during  the  last  week  of  May  or  the  first  week  in  June, 
and  in  the  Tay  weigh  from  i^-  to  2^  Ibs.,  while  in  some  rivers  they  are 
even  smaller.  Most  of  the  northern  rivers  are  much  earlier  than  the 
Tay,  and  grilse  make  their  appearance  as  early  as  the  first  week  in 
April.  As  the  season  advances  the  weight  of  the  grilse  increases 
rapidly.  This  is  due  to  its  food  being  most  plentiful  in  the  summer 
months.  At  the  end  of  June  they  weigh  about  5  Ibs.,  at  the  end  of 
July  8  Ibs.,  and  at  the  end  of  August  10  Ibs. — exceptionally  large  ones 
weighing  from  10  to  12  Ibs.  In  cold,  backward  seasons  they  are  much 
smaller,  and  this  applies  to  all  rivers  in  Great  Britain.  The  grilse 
distribute  themselves  over  the  whole  river,  and  the  run  continues  until 
the  end  of  December.  In  the  first  week  of  November  spawning 
commences.  Many  return  to  the  sea  soon  after  spawning,  while 
others  remain  until  April,  and  are  very  greatly  reduced  in  weight, 
averaging  from  2  to  7  Ibs.  Their  sojourn  in  the  sea  varies  from  three 
and  a  half  to  eighteen  months.  During  this  interval  a  rapid  increase 
in  size  takes  place,  and  they  return  again  as  salmon,  double  their 
former  weight.  They  first  return  about  the  middle  of  June  (see 
scales  of  a  grilse  after  its  second  return  from  the  sea),  and  increase  in 
number  and  weight  until  the  end  of  December,  their  age  at  the  latter 
date  being  four  years  and  nine  months.  Others  remain  in  the  sea 
during  the  winter,  and  do  not  return  until  the  next  summer,  having 
been  away  for  one  and  a  half  years.  Thus  some  spawn  in  each  of  two 
consecutive  years,  while  others  only  spawn  once  in  that  time.  Unless 
one  has  studied  scales,  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  between  a  kelt  grilse 
of  4  Ibs.  and  a  kelt  of  a  small  spring  fish  of  the  same  weight.  This 
can  easily  be  done,  however,  by  counting  the  number  of  rings  on  the 
scales,  or  the  number  of  contractions  on  the  scales. 

Hitherto  it  was  thought  that  the  small  and  the  large  spring 
salmon  were  from  kelts  of  grilse  of  the  previous  year,  but  this  is  not 
the  case.  The  small  spring  fish  are  of  the  same  age  as  these  grilse. 
They  come  up  in  the  following  spring,  and  are  from  15  to  40  Ibs.  in 


12 


The   Salmon 


weight.  This  is  their  first  return  from  the  sea  since  migrating 
about  three  years  previously  as  smolts,  and  they  are  therefore  five 
years  old.  Very  few,  indeed,  have  spawned  before.  There  is  no 
difficulty  in  distinguishing  between  fish  that  have  spawned  before  and 
those  that  have  never  spawned.  The  latter  almost  always  have  spots 
on  the  body  near  the  gill-covers,  and  parasites  are  usually  attached  to 
their  gills.  I  have  now  reached  the  end  of  the  grilse  stage. 

Other  smolts  going  down  at  the  same  date — April — as  the  ones 
the  grilse  come  from,  instead  of  returning  as  grilse  begin  to  run  about 
the  middle  of  December,  when  the  grilse  have  almost  ceased.  These 
are  clean  fish,  and  will  not  spawn  till  November,  being  thus  nearly  a 
year  in  fresh  water  before  spawning.  The  first  run  of  these  fish  in 
the  Tay  usually  weigh  about  6  Ibs.  each,  and  the  weight  continues  to 
increase  with  every  catch  up  to  the  middle  of  June,  when  a  weight  of 
from  ii  to  13  Ibs.  is  attained.  By  this  time  the  run  is  completely 
over.  From  the  results  of  our  marking  it  will  be  seen  that  the  earliest 
of  these  fish  have  been  in  the  sea  seventeen  months  from  the  time 
they  went  down  as  smolts,  in  April  1905  ;  and  the  last,  which  were 
caught  on  the  I4th  of  June,  twenty-three  and  a  half  months.  A  very 
few  may  be  later.  I  have  paid  particular  attention  to  this  run  of  fish 
for  the  last  nine  years,  and  I  find  that  they  disappear  at  the  same  time 
almost  to  a  day  every  year.  Many  people  hold  the  opinion  that  these 
fish  are  belated  grilse,  but  I  have  always  differed  from  them.  These 
fish  are  similar  to  the  small  fish  found  in  the  North  Esk,  the  South 
Esk,  the  Dee,  the  Findhorn,  the  Ness,  the  Beauly,  the  Brora,  the 
Helmsdale,  the  Thurso,  and  many  other  rivers.  Some  years  they  are 
more  plentiful  than  others  :  this  year — 1907 — they  were  very  plentiful. 
They  run  very  fast  and  push  far  inland,  are  very  strong,  and  able  to 
surmount  very  high  falls.  Taking  freely  they  afford  splendid  sport 
to  the  angler,  while  for  the  table  they  cannot  be  surpassed.  In  May 
and  June  few  of  them  remain  in  the  lower  reaches.  I  have  known 
them  to  run  30  miles  in  two  days.  Spawning  commences  about  the 
middle  of  November,  and  being  mostly  in  the  higher  reaches  and  in 
the  smaller  rivers,  the  fish  fall  back  quickly  afterwards.  Besides  what 


The   Salmon  :3 

we  have  mentioned,  there  is  still  another  distinct  run  of  fish  of  the 

same  marking  (April  and  May  1905),  which  comes  on  a  month  later 

(iSth  July  1907).      From  the  marking  it  will  be  observed  that  the  last 

marked  fish,  when  caught  on  i4th  June   1907,  was  11   Ibs.     The  next 

fish  was  caught  on  iSth  July,  and  weighed  i8J  Ibs.  ;   while  the  largest 

marked    fish,    got    on    9th    August,    weighed    27    Ibs.       During    the 

month  of  August  marked  fish  were  got  almost  every  day  up  to  the 

2Oth,  when  the   net-fishing  closes.      One  weighing    15   Ibs.  was  got  on 

the   2Oth  of  September  on    Stanley  Water  by   Mr.    F.    Martin  when 

angling;  and  another  was  caught  while  we  were  netting  for  ova.      In 

October  some  of  these  fish  reach  the  weight  of  30  Ibs.,  and,  as  was 

said   above,  begin    running   about    the   middle   of   July  and   cease    in 

December.     The  earliest  of  these  fish  have  been  in  the  sea  for  two 

years  and  two  and  a  half  months,  and  the  latest  of  them  for  two  years 

and  seven  months.      Those  that   survive  spawn,  become  kelts,  and  go 

back  to  the  sea  in  November  and  December  (1907).     Taking  the  end 

of  March    1903   as   the  time  of   hatching,   it    will    thus   be    seen    that 

they  are  four   years  and    nine    months  old,   although   if  any  one  had 

asserted  a  few  years  ago  that  fish  were  from    12   to   30  Ibs.   on  their 

first  return   from  the    sea    after  going    down  as  smolts,  and  had  not 

spawned,  he  would  have  been  held  up  to  ridicule. 

There  is  still  another  run  of  the  same  marking,  April   and   May 
1905.     This  is  the  great  run  of  winter  or  spring  fish,  which,  like  the 
last  run,  are  in  the  pink  of  condition  and  surpass  all  the  other  runs  of 
fish.      These   fish   will   not   spawn   till   the   next    November,    some   of 
them  being  in  the  river  over  a  year  before  spawning.      Many  of  these 
large  fish  find  their  way  into   Loch   Tay,  Loch  Ness,  the  river  Ness, 
the  river  Garry,  and  the  Spey.      A  number  are  also  found  in  the  Dee, 
the   Tay,   the    Tummel ;    the   Wye   in    England  ;    the   Boyne  and  the 
Blackwater  in  Ireland,  and  other  spring  rivers,  where  large  spring  fish 
give  fine  sport  at  the  opening  of  the  season.      The  two  earliest  rivers 
in  Scotland  are  the  Tay  and  the   Ness.      In  some  seasons  the  average 
weight  of  the  spring  fish  caught   in  Loch   Tay  has  been  22  Ibs.,  and  in 
other  seasons  over  this  weight. 


i4  The   Salmon 

In  this,  which  I  consider  almost  the  last  run,  the  numbers  are 
greater  than  in  any  of  the  others.  Many  erroneous  theories  have 
been  put  forward  with  regard  to  these  fish.  Many  maintain  that  they 
return  to  the  sea,  and  again  return  to  the  rivers  to  spawn,  while  others 
think  they  do  not  spawn.  I  have  had  many  opportunities  of  proving 
both  of  these  theories  to  be  false.  These  fish,  being  in  perfect  condi- 
tion, must  start  in  the  winter  in  order  to  reach  their  destination  by 
spawning  time,  as  they  travel  more  slowly  in  the  cold  weather  of  winter 
and  spring,  and  consequently  take  weeks  to  get  to  Loch  Tay.  Many 
of  them,  when  delayed  by  frost  and  snow,  or  snow  and  high  water, 
take  months  to  accomplish  the  journey.  By  the  end  of  April  the 
run  may  be  said  to  be  over,  and  few  enter  Loch  Tay  after  this  date. 
With  the  first  flood,  about  the  1510  of  May,  they  leave  Loch  Tay 
and  ascend  the  river  Dochart.  Sometimes  they  may  be  delayed  a 
month  or  more  for  want  of  water,  but  when  a  spate  does  come 
they  are  ready  to  ascend,  and  find  their  way  through  the  river 
Dochart  into  Loch  Dochart.  Throughout  the  summer  and  autumn, 
and  as  spawning-time  approaches,  they  make  their  way  into  the 
smaller  streams  which  enter  Loch  Dochart,  and  there  deposit  their 
spawn  about  the  I5th  November,  and  soon  after  return  as  kelts. 
Their  age  in  April  is  five  years.  This  is  their  first  return  from 
the  sea,  the  earliest  of  them  having  been  in  the  salt  water  two  years 
and  six  months,  and  the  latest  three  years.  This  completes  the  four 
runs  of  the  same  marking. 

From  now  onwards  the  number  greatly  decreases,  and  only  a 
few  stragglers  from  27  to  40  Ibs.  come  on  till  the  end  of  the  year. 
These  are  from  five  to  six  years  old.  After  this  there  are  a  few  from 
40  to  60  Ibs.  The  next  year  there  are  none,  making  the  extreme 
age  seven  or  eight  years. 

Few  of  them,  however,  reach  this  age,  and  all  these  salmon  are 
on  their  first  return  from  the  sea.  I  know  this  statement  will  be 
challenged  by  many.  We  have  as  yet  got  no  winter-marked  fish, 
because  it  is  not  yet  time  for  them  to  come.  They  will,  no  doubt,  be 
got  when  the  fishing  opens  in  1908.  I  have  come  to  this  conclusion 


The   Salmon  15 

beforehand  from  a  study  of  the  scales  of  fish,  which   I  will  endeavour 
to  explain  in  a  later  section  dealing  with  scales. 

What  has  been  said  of  the  marked  fish  may  be  put  in  a  con- 
densed form  as  follows.  The  fry  which  were  hatched  in  March  1903 
became  smolts  in  April  1905,  and  migrated  to  the  sea  in  April  and 
May  1905  at  the  age  of  two  years.  The  first  run  of  these  returned 
to  the  river  as  grilse  weighing  from  i^  to  12  or  13  Ibs.,  from  the  last 


FIG.  II. — Stormonttield  Ponds  on  the  Tay,  erected  1852. 

week  in  May  till  the  end  of  December  1906.  The  second  run 
continued  to  come  from  the  middle  of  December  1906  to  the  middle 
of  June  1907,  and  weighed  from  6  to  13  Ibs.  The  third  run  returned 
from  the  middle  of  July  1907  to  the  end  of  December,  and  weighed 
from  12  to  30  Ibs.  The  fourth  run  extended  from  the  middle  of 
October  1907  to  the  end  of  May  1908,  and  weighed  from  13  to  38  and 
occasionally  40  Ibs.  The  average  weight  was  about  20  Ibs.,  but  it 
varies  a  pound  or  two  from  year  to  year.  The  fifth  run  came  on  in 


i6 


The   Salmon 


May  1908  and  lasted  till  December,  and  their  weight  was  from  20  to 
45  Ibs.  The  sixth  run,  which  begins  in  December  1908,  will  continue 
till  December  1909.  These  will  be  few  in  number,  and  will  weigh 
from  30  to  70  Ibs.  This  is  the  first  return  of  all  these  runs  of  fish 
from  the  sea,  and  none  of  them  have  yet  spawned. 

From  the  books  on  the  natural  history  of  the  salmon  and  the 
experiments  at  the  Stormontfield  Ponds,  I,  like  most  other  people, 
was  led  to  believe  that  grilse  returned  from  the  sea  the  same  season 


FIG.  12.- — Smolt,  showing  how  ring  is  fastened  in  dorsal  fin.      When  25  Ibs.  this  ring  is 

completely  filled  up. 

as  they  went  down  as  smolts.  Mr.  Brown,  as  mentioned  in  his  book 
of  the  History  of  Stormontfield  Ponds,  marked  many  smolts  for  several 
years  by  cutting  off  the  adipose  fin.  Many  smolts  were  afterwards 
captured  without  the  adipose  fin,  and  these  Mr.  Brown  put  down  as 
his  marking.  From  a  study  of  scales,  however,  I  concluded  that 
Mr.  Brown  and  others  were  wrong  in  believing  that  smolts  returned 
so  soon,  for  I  could  find  no  scales  of  grilse  that  had  not  been  more 
than  a  year  in  the  sea ;  and  not  being  satisfied  with  the  various 
methods  of  marking  fish,  I  determined  to  mark  them  in  such  a  way 
that  they  would  be  known  all  through  life.  The  cutting  off  of  the 


The   Salmon  17 

adipose  fin  I  did  not  consider  sufficient,  because  on  several  occasions 


rt 
<u 


O 


O 
N 


O 

7. 


r<-> 

O 


I  have  seen   fish  caught  without  this  fin.      Others  again   pierced   the 
gills,   but  the  aperture  thus  made  soon  filled  up  again.      The  same 


The   Salmon 


thing  happened   when   a   part   was   cut   from   the   centre   of  the   tail. 
After  a  good  deal  of  experimenting  I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  the 


c 

CJ 
•— 

'5 

<L> 

<u 
C/3 

ts! 
C 


o 

ON 


tf 

rt 
U 


o 

E 


rt 

^ 


- 

O 

ON 


o 
5 


O 


best  way  to  mark  them  was  by  inserting  a  wire  through  the  thick  part 
in  front  of  the  dorsal  fin.      I   obtained  fine  silver  wire  and   cut   it   into 


The   Salmon 


suitable  lengths.      Being  so  fine  it   was  easily  pushed   through  ;    the 
two   ends  were  then    brought    together   and   twisted    round  with    the 


o 

ON 


ri 

s 


in 


0) 

c 


CS 

u 


o 

0) 


finger  and  thumb,  leaving  a  loop  sufficiently  large  to  enable  the  fish  to 
grow  to   25   Ibs.   before   it   would  fill   it  up.       Figs.    12    and    13    show 


2O 


The   Salmon 


marked  smolts.     One  man  holds  the  smolt  and   another  inserts  the 


rt 

s 

"o 
S 

<fi 

rt 

*  O 
a; 


6JO 

rt 
O 


rt 

5 


wire,  the  whole  operation    occupying   only  a  few   seconds.       Having 
obtained  leave  from   the  Tay   District   Board  and  our  Tay   Fisheries 


The   Salmon 


21 


Company  to   net   the   river,  we    started   work    on   the    ist    May  and 
netted   the    tidal  water  two   miles   below   Perth,   and   marked   all   the 


u~t 

oT 

ifl 

G 


o 


smolts  we;'found  till  middle  of  June.      These  were  caught  with  a  small- 
meshed  net  and  put   in  a  box  with    holes    in    the   bottom.      When   a 


22  The   Salmon 

smolt  was  wanted,  the  box  was  raised  and  the  water  ran  through  the 
holes.  One  man  caught  the  smolts  and  handed  them  to  the  one  who 
held  them  in  position  whilst  they  were  being  marked.  They  were 
instantly  dropped  into  the  river  again,  and  swam  away  at  once. 
The  greatest  care  was  taken  to  mark  nothing  but  smolts  of  Salmo 
sa/ar,  all  parr  and  yellow  fins  being  rejected;  so  that  so  far  as  we  could 
judge  nothing  but  smolts  were  marked.  I  intended  all  the  smolts  to 
be  marked  in  the  same  place — in  the  gristly  part  in  front  of  the  dorsal 
fin  ;  but  after  a  time  the  markers  began  to  take  in  two  rays  of  the 


FIG.  19. — Marked  Grilse,  3^  Ibs.,  3rd  July  1906.      Smolt  marked  May  1905. 

fin  without  my  observing  it.  On  discovering  this,  I  decided  to  do 
the  marking  again  another  year,  as  I  was  afraid  the  aperture  would 
grow  upwards  with  the  fin  and  the  wire  would  fall  out,  thus  making 
our  work  go  for  nothing.  We  watched  carefully  during  the  whole 
of  the  summer,  but  no  marked  fish  were  found.  On  the  ist  of  June  of 
the  following  year  we  got  the  first  wire  in  a  grilse  which  weighed 
2  Ibs.  15  oz.  The  mark  and  the  fish  are  shown  in  Fig.  14. 
The  mark  was  slightly  spoiled  with  the  net.  This  grilse  with 
the  mark  on  it  (Fig.  14)  we  handed  over  to  the  Perthshire 
Society  of  Natural  Science.  The  capture  of  this  grilse  was  the 
means  of  making  our  manager,  Mr.  David  Robb,  our  Secretary, 
Mr.  Harry  Robb,  Mr.  W.  M'Nicol,  and  Mr.  John  Robertson 


The   Salmon  23 

take    the   greatest    interest    in    the    marking,  and    now   all    fish   that 
come   into  our  fish-house  are  examined  for  wires.      This,   of  course, 


8, 


H 

OJ 


,0 

ON 


g 
V 


entails   a   great  deal  of   work,   for   on    certain   occasions  from   one   to 
two   thousand    fish    have    to    be    examined    in    one    day.       Not    only 


The   Salmon 


M 

o 
c- 


O 


has  a  careful  record  of  the  dates  of  capture  and  of  the  weights  been 
kept,   but  all  the  different  classes  of  fish  have  been   carefully  noted 

down.  \Yhen  there  was 
any  doubt  about  a  fish 
the  scales  were  examined. 
Few  could  have  the  oppor- 
tunity of  capturing  or 
marking  the  fish  so  well, 
as  we  control  the  whole  of 
the  river  Tay,  from  Stanley 
to  the  mouth,  and  also 
part  of  the  coast.  Prac- 
tically all  salmon  caught 
on  the  Tay  therefore  pass 
through  our  hands.  It 
Was  during  the  net-fishing 
season,  which  opens  on 
the  5th  of  February  and 
closes  on  the  2Oth  of 
August,  that  we  had  the 
best  opportunity  of  catch- 
ing them.  Only  two  have 
been  caught  with  the  rod. 
The  wires  have  thus  served 
their  purpose  quite  well, 
and,  as  was  expected,  have 
grown  up  with  the  fin  (Fig. 
1 6)  in  many  cases,  and  have 
remained  in  it.  Those 
which  were  put  in  farther 
forward  have  remained 
farther  down.  The  fol- 
lowing are  the  dates  of  capture  and  the  weights  of  marked  fish 
caught  in  1906  : 


c 

^<u 
rt 

§ 


The   Salmon 


GRILSE 


Date  of 
Capture. 

June 


July 


55 
5) 


I 

26 
28 

3 

4 
10 


16 
16 
17 
24 
26 
28 


Weight                 Date  of 

in  Ibs. 

Capture. 

2TTT 

July    28 

4 

Aug.      4 

4| 

4 

31 

4 

52 

4 

4i 

7 

5! 

„        3 

7 

9 

61 

„      10 

6f 

55            I   I 

4| 

„            13 

5i 

„            M 

7 

„      '4 

Weight 

in  Ibs. 

Date  of 
Capture. 

7&                 Aug.    15 

5                    „      15 

5f                  5,      1  6 

7| 

„       16 

8 

„      16 

6f 

„      16 

4 

„      16 

6* 
5* 

»i 

,5             17 

55             '   / 

„      18 

61                        1  8 

Weight 
in  Ibs. 


8 
10 


20 
20 


9 

7 
6 


The  total  weight  of  the  forty  fish  was  266^f  Ibs.  1  think  these 
results  clearly  prove  that  smolts  going  down  in  April  and  May  do  not 
return  as  grilse  until  the  following  year.  It  has  been  said  that  if  they 
do  return  sooner  they  must  be  very  small ;  but  I  do  not  believe 
they  return  the  same  year.  Even  if  one  were  caught,  say  i  Ib.  in 
weight,  it  would  be  impossible  to  tell,  even  by  the  scales,  whether  it 
had  been  to  the  sea  or  not.  We  have  on  many  occasions  seen  and 
have  caught  scores  of  smolts  which  have  been  confined  in  a  loch 
three,  six,  and  twelve  months  up  to  three  years  after  they  had  turned 
smolts.  These  weighed  from  6  oz.  to  2  Ibs.  and  any  of  them 
escaping  might  easily  have  been  mistaken  for  young  grilse.  I  will 
treat  more  fully  of  these  and  give  illustrations  of  them  in  another 
section.  Our  marked  smolts,  so  far  as  my  judgment  goes,  were  all 
at  least  two  years  old  in  March  1905.  In  this  connection  readers 
might  bear  in  mind  that  all  our  captures  are  from  the  same  marking 
of  1905. 

The  difference  in  weight  will  be  seen  from  these  grilse  :  the  first, 
caught  on  ist  June,  was  2  Ibs.  15  oz.,  and  the  largest,  caught  on  iSth 
August,  was  10  Ibs.  8  oz.  This  great  difference  in  weight  seems  to 
indicate  that  the  fish  both  feed  and  increase  in  weight  much  more 

4 


26  The   Salmon 

during  the  summer  months  than  they  do  in  the  winter  months.      The 


vO 


H 

H 

•f) 

o 

oT 
•/) 

5 

u 


i 
i 


marking  of  kelts  and    noting   their  return  prove  the  same   thing,   as 
can  also  be  seen  from  the  scales. 


The  Salmon 


For  an  opportunity  of  getting  more  wired  fish  we  had  to  wait 


rt 


pO 

O 


CX3      C 
-    1C 


HH  _ 

>>  p 

rt      C 


—  O 

O  J3 

P  CO 

Cfi 


-a    "> 

OJ      0) 

-^  -C 


S     § 


HCl 
ON 


O 


until  the   nets   opened   on   the    5th    February   the  next  year- -1907. 
On    the    1 8th    of    February    we    got    our    first    wired    fish,    weighing 


28 


The   Salmon 


^  Ibs.  (Fig.  23),  and  the  following  day  we  got  another,  weighing  8  Ibs. 
From   then  on   to   I4th   June  we  got   the  following  wired  fish,  which 


,a 

00 


were  marked  as   smolts  in   May   1905,  and  returned  as   small  spring 
fish  in  1907  :— 


The   Salmon 


Date  of 

Weight 

Date  of 

Weight                  Date  of 

Weight 

Capture. 

in  Ibs. 

Capture. 

in  Ibs.                  Capture. 

in  Ibs. 

Feb.       1  8      . 

•    9i 

April     2 

.      9%               May        8      . 

•      7f 

19     • 

.      8 

„        6        . 

,     8J                              9       - 

.    io£ 

21      . 

•      9 

9 

.      9i                   „         10       . 

.     81 

22       . 

•     7i 

„      n 

.iol                   „         14       . 

.    nf 

March     6      . 

•      7i 

»      23 

.      10 

21 

•     l  r¥ 

8      . 

•      7 

„      26 

.      10 

23     . 

.    iol 

12        . 

•      7 

»      29 

.     IO-J 

30     • 

•      9i 

»          15        • 

.    iol 

»      3° 

'  13 

June       4 

•      9| 

16      . 

•     9i 

May     6 

.12!            „      II    . 

•     l  T4 

„       29      . 

•    13 

7 

•      9f                   „         14      . 

.     I  I 

These  thirty  fish  weighed  in  all  292^  Ibs.  The  above  are  the  dates 
of  the  first  return  of  these  fish  from  the  sea ;  and  they  solved  a  great 
mystery,  for  it  was  not  known  what  they  came  from  or  whether  they 
had  yet  spawned.  I  have  taken  several  photographs  of  these  wired 
fish,  which  will  be  reproduced  as  illustrations. 

A  little  over  a  month  elapsed  before  we  found  another  wired  fish 
(Fig.  26).     The  dates  and  weights  are  as  follows  :- 


Date  of 

Weight 

Date  of 

Weight 

Date  of 

Weight 

Capture. 

in  Ibs. 

Capture. 

in  Ibs. 

Capture. 

in  Ibs. 

July    1  8 

.    i8i 

Aug.     8 

.     14 

Aug.      3 

•  !7i 

„         20 

•    U 

»        9 

.    27 

M                  5 

•  M 

„         20 

.    16 

,,I5 

.     21 

5 

.    16! 

,,        22 

•    '9* 

»      '5 

.    15* 

„        6 

I4| 

„    24 

.     I  2 

»      r5 

'4f 

7 

•   !7i 

„     27 

.     I?i 

„      16 

•    19 

„        8         . 

•   I6i 

„     31 

.    i8i 

»      19 

.    i7i 

„        8         . 

I  2 

Aug.     3 

•  isi 

„        20           I 

4 

„        8         . 

•   !5i 

»        3 

•    'SI 

The  net-fishing  closed  on  2Oth  August.  Another  fish  was  caught  by 
the  rod  on  2Oth  September,  weighing  15  Ibs.,  and  one  16  Ibs.  was 
caught  while  we  were  fishing  for  ova.  These  twenty-seven  fish 
weighed  449  Ibs. 

This  third  run  of  fish  solved  even  a  greater  mystery  than  the 
small  spring  fish,  for  no  one  believed  that  these  two  runs  of  fish  were 
of  the  same  age,  or  that  there  was  one  run  distinct  from  another  ; 
neither  was  it  thought  that  it  .was  their  first  return  from  the  sea.  These 


The   Salmon 


fish  are  now--ist  August — four  years  and  four  months  old, and  have  been 
in  the  sea  two  years  and  two  months  since  they  went  down  as  smolts. 


tx 

c 


We  had  no  opportunity  of  getting  more  marked  fish  until  February 
1908.  On  7th  February  we  caught  with  the  net  a  spring  fish  weighing 
15  Ibs.  It  was  newly  from  the  sea  on  its  first  return  (Fig.  29).  On 


The   Salmon 


nth  February  a  wired  fish  was  got  with  the  rod  on  Faskally  Water, 
weighing  15  Ibs.;  on  I3th  February  one  was  caught  weighing  38^  Ibs.; 


U1 

O 

ON 


<5 
"3 

•J} 

•r. 

rt 

u 


-C      C 

tf  •- 


, 

O    "- 


c 

O 


VO 
N 


and  on    I5th   February  another  was  got,  weighing    13   Ibs.  (Fig.   31). 
Still  another  was  got  on  3ist  March  and  weighed  35  Ibs.  (Fig.  32). 


32  The   Salmon 

The  history  of  these  fish,  which  will  be  five  years  old  in  March,  is 
now  quite  clear.  Out  of  over  a  thousand  fish  which  I  examined 
during  the  last  two  weeks  of  February,  all,  with  the  exception  of 
about  ten  per  cent,  which  had  spawned,  were  of  the  same  age,  viz. 
five  years,  and  their  average  weight  was  about  20  Ibs.  The  one 
caught  on  i3th  February  1908,  weighing  38^  Ibs.,  belongs  to  the  same 
run  and  is  of  the  same  age,  so  that  up  to  I5th  February  1908  we  have 
these  spring  fish  on  their  first  return  from  the  sea,  weighing  from  13 


FIG.  27. — Mark  of  i8|-lb.  Salmon  shown,  caught  iSth  July  1907.     Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905. 

to  38^7  Ibs.  The  last-mentioned  weight  is  no  doubt  exceptional.  The 
wired  fish,  35  Ibs.  in  weight,  caught  at  Almond  Mouth  station  on 
3ist  March  1908,  is  the  largest  marked  fish  we  have  got.  It 
had  been  in  the  sea  within  a  month  of  three  years,  and  had  not 
spawned.  (See  illustration  of  the  fish  and  of  its  scale,  Figs.  32,  80.) 
It  was  therefore  of  the  same  age  as  the  others  already  mentioned, 
viz.  five  years. 

Although  the  marking  of  these  smolts  and  the  capture  of  so  many 
of  them  has  added  much  to  our  knowledge,  and  cleared  up  many 
matters  of  which  little  was  known,  something  yet  requires  to  be  done 
in  marking  fish  from  the  different  runs  in  order  to  be  able  to  tell 


The   Salmon 


33 


whether  the  new  generation  do  as  their  parents  did.      Until  this  is 
done  we  will  not  know  whether  the  grilse  is  from   the  spring  or  the 


tJO 

cj 

«-i 

fSl 

<u 

rt 
t-1 


'O     5 

S    <» 

~ 


I 

rt     C 


M 

O 


_ 

rt 
CO 


OO 
ct 


autumn  run,  or  whether  the   small  spring  run  is  from  the  large  spring 
fish  or  the  autumn  run.      This  spring,  when  the  smolts  from  ova  taken 

5 


34 


The   Salmon 


from   autumn    fish  were    liberated    from   the   Stormontfield   Ponds,    I 


rt 

s 


C/l 


<u 


oo 
o 


a 

>-     « 
.3      11 


ri 

o    „ 


o 
_£ 

"cs 


u 

U) 


intended  marking  them,  but  something  happened  which  reduced  the 
numbers  so  much  that  there  were  not  sufficient  to  mark. 

I  am  fully  convinced  that  many  of  our  fish  from  40  Ibs.  and  up- 


The   Salmon 


35 


wards  are  on  their  first  return  from  the  sea  when  they  are  captured 
in  fresh  water.  I  have  examined  closely  for  the  last  eight  years 
all  fish  brought  into  our  fish-house,  and  on  many  occasions  I  have 
counted  the  number  of  those  that  have  spawned  and  the  number  that 
have  not.  In  the  middle  of  July  I  found  nineteen  out  of  every 
hundred  had  spawned,  and  that  all  the  others  were  on  their  first  return 
from  the  sea.  The  prime-conditioned  fish  are  those  on  their  first 
return,  and  those  that  have  spawned  are  coarse,  and  when  cut  up  the 
flesh  is  white,  hence  the  reason  for  their  being  thought  and  called 


FlG.  30. — Showing  mark  of  15-lb.  Spring  Salmon.      First  caught,  7th  February  1908. 

Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905. 

bull-trout.  I  am  afraid  I  am  here  giving  information  which  will  be 
valuable  to  the  fishmonger  but  disadvantageous  to  the  tacksman.  It 
may  also  be  useful  to  the  reader  in  enabling  him  to  select  a  prime- 
conditioned  fish  for  the  table.  The  poor  tacksman  usually  receives  a 
much  lower  price  for  what  are  erroneously  called  bull-trout.  We  have 
now  proved  beyond  doubt  that  these  fish  are  not  a  different  species,  but 
are  true  salmon  that  have  spawned.  How  this  should  alter  their 
shape  and  colour  is  difficult  to  understand.  It  may  be  that  the  greedy 
kelt,  when  its  digestive  organs  come  again  into  action,  eats  more 
ravenously,  rendering  it  coarser  and  stronger  than  before.  The  wildest 
fish  that  the  angler  has  to  do  with  are,  of  course,  those  that  have 
spawned  and  have  returned  again  as  clean  fish.  This  throws  some 


The   Salmon 


light  on  a  matter  that  has  troubled  many,  most  believing  that  if  all  the 
kelts  were  killed  there  would  be  no  large  salmon.      By  our  marking 


rt 

<u 


CO 

o 

c\ 


_u 

I-!-! 
J3 


U 


a 
x 


CO 

O 


however,  we  have  proved  that  we  can  have  large  salmon  although  all 
the  kelts  are  killed.     This  does  not  mean  that  we  should  kill  the  kelts 


The   Salmon  37 

for  all  that  ;  for  when  we  consider  that  there  are  nineteen  of  these  in 


^ 

H 

:  «• 
S  s 


00      0) 

o    > 


rj  ^»* 

ii  ^ 

rt 

S  ^ 

*-•  i- 

—  i 


H  •£ 

V    _>, 

"^    "k- 
rt 

S    aj 
O    C 


II 

-a  c 
n  " 
o  c 


WJ  •« 
rt    u-> 

C     b 


CT;     N 

__    o 


n    -^ 

S    o 

X     rt 


r-o 

O 


every  hundred  clean  fish  which  return  from  the  sea,  the  kelt  is  well 
worth  protecting.      The  proportion  is   not  so  great  in  spring,  but  I 


The   Salmon 


have  no  doubt  it  will  be  greater  after  the  nets  go  off.      Many  people 
talk  of  a  double  migration  of  fish,  which  I   have  never  been  able   to 


o 
i 

e 


fa 


3- 

cr- 


fa 


J3 


O 

E 
"S 

C/5 


C 

fa 


understand.     Some  say  the  small  spring  fish  are  belated  grilse  ;  while 
others  declare  they  are  from  an  autumn  migration  of  smolts.     To  put 


The   Salmon 


39 


these  theories  to  the  test,  we  had  the  Tay  netted  at  different  times 
during  the  autumn  and  found  none,  so  that  so  far  as  the  Tay  is  con- 


IV. 

O 


3 
< 

-o 


_i2 
O 


rt 

in 

•1) 
"rt 


ro 

U 


cerned  there  is  no  autumn  migration.     No  doubt  in  a  dry  season  many 
smolts  in  small  burns  and  lochs  are  deprived  for  want  of  water  of  a 


The   Salmon 


passage  to  the  sea.      Two  years  ago  the  Thurso  was  so  dry  all  summer 


rt 

<u 


O 


1) 

to 


-c 
o 

a 

s 


o 
If 

»• 

o 

S 

"rt 
C/3 
0) 


10 

ro 


rt 

<D 
U3 

OJ 


,2 
O 


c 
o 


rt 

C/2 


1) 


that  the  smolts  did  not   reach   the  sea   until  September,  when   they 
were  6  or  7  oz.  in  weight ;  but  this  could  not  be  called  an  autumn 


The   Salmon  4I 

migration.  I  think  it  would  be  absurd  to  call  the  tish  a  belated  grilse 
we  caught  on  9th  August  (Fig.  28),  weighing  27  Ibs.,  on  its  first 
return  from  the  sea,  or  a  6o-lb.  fish  arriving  from  the  sea  for  the  first 
time  at  the  ripe  age  of  seven  years. 

The  marking  of  the  smolts  and  their  recapture  afterwards  has 
enabled  us  to  know  for  certain  whether  the  small  spring  fish  will  be 
plentiful  or  scarce,  and  what  the  other  runs  that  follow  will  be,  long 


FIG.  37. — Showing  mark  of  first  small  Spring  fish,  9^  Ibs.,  caught  iSth  February  1907. 

Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905. 

before  the  fish  enter  the  river,  and  it  also  enables  us  to  tell  whether 
the  fish  will  be  large  or  small. 

I  will  now  return  to  the  grilse  from  4  to  13  Ibs.  that  run  from  the 
middle  of  May  to  the  middle  or  end  of  December.  These  spawn  the 
same  season  as  they  come  up  and  become  kelts  (Fig.  38).  Many  of 
them,  both  male  and  female,  die  after  spawning,  the  mortality  amongst 
males  predominating.  A  few  of  those  that  return  to  the  sea  re-enter 
the  rivers  as  clean  fish,  after  being  three  or  four  months  in  the  sea. 
On  their  return  about  June  they  are  double  the  weight  they  were 
when  they  went  down,  and  as  the  season  advances  the  number  and 
weight  increase.  We  know  this  from  marking  the  kelt  grilse. 

Until  a  year  ago  we  called  all  these  fish  that  returned  bull-trout,  not 

6 


The   Salmon 


knowing    the    change    that    had    taken    place    was    caused    by    their 
having  spawned.      They  are  now  spotted,  and  have  maggots   in  their 

gills.  These  kelt  grilse  keep  on  re- 
turning until  December,  and  spawn 
the  same  season  (Fig.  39). 

I  will  now  treat  of  what  becomes 
of  the  small  spring  fish  kelts  (Fig. 
40) — those  from  December  to  the 
middle  of  June.  A  smaller  number 
of  this  second  run  die  after  spawning 
than  of  the  kelt  grilse.  These  kelts 
return  during  the  autumn,  winter, 
and  spring,  and  most  of  them  dis- 
appear by  the  end  of  April.  Like 
the  grilse  kelt,  they  begin  to  return 
again  about  the  middle  of  June  ;  and 
many  of  them  are  of  the  same  size 
as  the  grilse  kelts -- about  5  or 
6  Ibs.  They  increase  in  weight  as 
the  season  advances,  and  by  Sep- 
tember some  are  caught  up  to 
12  and-  14  Ibs.,  according  to  the 
weight  of  the  kelt  that  went  down. 
Strange  to  relate,  almost  all  the  kelts 
that  have  been  marked  on  the  Tay 
and  recaptured  have  been  females. 
Particulars  of  some  of  these  kelts 
that  were  marked  and  afterwards 
caught  in  our  nets  are  given 
below  : — 


o 

>-l 

rt 


O 


o 
£ 


Date  of 
Marking. 

April   I  I,    1906 
Feb.    10,   1903 


Weight 
in  Ibs. 


Date  of 
Recapture. 

Aug.     9,  1906 
Aug.  20,  1903 


Weight 

in  Ibs. 

Ill 
>4f 


The   Salmon  43 

Many  others  were  recorded  as  being  recaptured  the  same  season.     See 


s    o 

-   2 

H  "E. 

u 

L> 

•f.    X 


t/J 


rt  ~    ta 


O    -C 
o   •"" 


fi 
0, 


£    cs  _o  " 

"*""    o    ^j 
c  —    H 


C  2    X  rt 

O  fcj     ^ 

§  S'S  ^ 

**  OJ  *^ 

C/j  i_      ^  rt 

„.  |  I  G 

^^  t/j  ^-* 

a  ^  g  »- 

^-  o  "5  J8 

P  "    o  ^ 


=  ?o  2  S 

s  C-H  e 

6   o  =   « 
x  J  K 

=ll| 

— '  o    S 


trt     *-i 

S 


Blue-books  for  1903-6.      It  will  be  observed  that  these  fish  were  all 
caught  the  same  season  as  they  went  down.      It  will  be  seen  from  the 


44 


The   Salmon 


following,  however,  that  others  remain  a  much  longer  time  in  the  sea 
before  they  return.      We  find  fish  of  the  same  marking  returning  the 


(J 


tfl 


next  year.      For  example,  a  kelt  of  6  Ibs.  marked  on  26th  January  1902 
was  caught  as  a  clean  fish  of  18  Ibs.  on  iSth  March  1903.     I  selected  this 


The  Salmon 


45 


fish  as  an  example  because  it  is  impossible  that  it  could  have  spawned. 
Others  stayed  a  longer  period  before  returning.  A  kelt  of  8  Ibs., 
which  was  marked  on  i/th  January 
1902,  was  20  Ibs.  3  oz.  when  caught 
as  a  clean  fish  on  iSth  August 
1903;  while  another  of  3  Ibs.  on 
3ist  January  1906  was  11  Ibs.  on 
2;th  April  1907.  Kelts  marked  on 
other  rivers  give  much  the  same 
result,  showing  clearly  that  they  re- 
main longer  than  a  year  in  the  sea, 
thus  continuing  the  same  habits  as 
they  had  after  going  down  as 
smolts.  Their  growth  is  remark- 
able, for  although  marked  as  kelts 
in  January,  they  may  not  have 
entered  the  sea  till  April.  The 
6-lb.  one  has  increased  to  18  Ibs.  ; 
and  another  of  6  Ibs.  caught  on 
2Oth  August  of  the  same  year, 
which  has  become  i4f-  Ibs.,  may  not 
have  been  in  the  sea  more  than 
four  months.  This  increase  is  not 
so  remarkable,  however,  as  that  of 
the  small  smolt  going  down,  weigh- 
ing i  to  2  oz.,  in  April  or  May 
1905,  and  returning  on  gth  August 
1907,  27  Ibs.  in  weight!  This  I 
consider  the  greatest  increase  that 
is  known  of  any  marked  fish  of  the 
salmon  kind.  Those  running  after 
July  are  larger — from  12  to  20  Ibs. 
—and  all  spawn  and  become  kelts.  Many  of  them  die  after  spawning. 
The  following  are  particulars  of  some  of  these  marked  kelts  (Fig.  41): — 


t/J 


CA: 


46  The   Salmon 


Date  of  Weight 

Marking.  in  Ibs. 

Feb.       14,  1906  .  .12 

Jan.       1 6,  1906  .  .11 

Jan.       19,  1906  .  .12^ 

March     8.  1905  .  .      13 


Date  of  Weight 

Recapture.  in  Ibs. 

Aug.     4,  1906  .  .      2o| 

July    25,   1906  .      24^ 

May   18,  1907  .          .      23^ 

July    21,   1906  .  27 


There  is  not  the  slightest  doubt  that  the  short  and  the  long  period  in 
the  sea  are  common  to  all  the  different  runs.  I  need  not,  however, 
pursue  this  matter  further,  as  it  would  be  confusing,  for  the  next  run 
of  fish  would  be  pretty  much  the  same.  I  will  endeavour,  when 
describing  the  scales,  to  give  more  information  as  to  the  time  these 
fish  remain  in  the  sea  after  having  been  in  the  river  as  clean  fish.  The 
marking  of  so  many  fish  in  different  rivers  and  their  capture  afterwards 
prove  that  almost  all  fish  return  to  their  own  native  river.  A  few  have 
certainly  been  got  a  considerable  distance  from  their  own  river,  but  it  is 
probable  that  even  these  would  have  found  their  way  back  to  their  own 
river  had  they  escaped  capture.  This,  then,  is  a  good  guarantee  to  those 
who  have  charge  of  any  river,  that  whatever  improvement  they  make 
is  for  the  benefit  of  their  own  river  and  not  for  those  of  other  people. 

Since  writing  the  above  we  have  seen  the  close  of  the  netting 
season  of  1907  ;  and  from  the  marking  of  the  smolts  and  its  results 
most  valuable  information  has  been  obtained  respecting  the  supply 
of  salmon  in  after  years.  The  year  1905  was  a  good  year  for  smolts  ; 
1906  was  therefore  a  good  year  for  grilse;  1907  was  a  good  year  for 
small  spring  fish;  from  this  I  expected  that  1908  would  be  a  good 
year  for  large  spring  fish,  and  such  has  been  the  case.  On  the  other 
hand,  1907  was  a  bad  year  for  grilse,  and  I  accordingly  suspected 
that  1908  would  be  a  bad  year  for  small  spring  fish;  and  this  year 
1908  being  a  good  grilse  season,  will  also  be  a  good  year  for  small 
spring  fish  in  1909,  and  a  good  year  for  large  spring  fish  in  1910.  This 
will  apply  both  to  England  and  Scotland,  and  so  well  do  we  know  this 
now  that  I  can  almost  tell  what  proportion  of  fish  will  follow  in  the 
different  runs  from  the  number  of  grilse  captured. 

On  5th  July  1909  we  caught  in  our  nets  on  the  Tay  a  female  fish 
of  26^  Ibs.  (Fig.  42),  one  of  those  marked  as  a  smolt  in  May  1905. 


The  Salmon 


47 


From  the  general  appearance  and  by  a  study  of  the  scales  it  is  evident 
that  this  fish  had  spawned.     After  going  down  in  May  1905  it  had  re- 


O 
ON 


rt 

u 


O 

ON 


rt 

rj 


O 

"rt 


mained  in  the  sea  for  a  period  of  2f  years,  had  come  up,  spawned,  and  re- 
turned to  the  sea  as  a  kelt  in  March,  and  re-entered  the  river  on  5th  July 


48 


The   Salmon 


1909,  when  it  was  caught.      It  will  thus  be  6^  years  old.     The  photo- 
graph shows  the  spots  near  to  the  gill-cover,  which  is  a  certain  sign 


! 


G  years,  3  months 


\ 


Si; 

ra 


FIG.  43. — Scale  of  26i-lb.  Salmon  (Fig.  42).      Marked  as  a  Smolt  May  1905.     Caught  5th  July  1509. 

of  the  fish  having  spawned.  This  is  the  most  important  marked  fish 
we  have  got,  more  than  a  year  having  elapsed  since  the  last  of  the 
same  marking  was  captured.  It  was  got  in  March  of  the  previous 


The  Salmon  49 

year  and  weighed  35  Ibs.,  although  it  was  more  than  a  year  younger 
than  the  one  just  caught,  the  difference  in  weight  being  due  to  the 
fact  that  the  younger  one  had  not  spawned.  The  weight  of  the 
present  one  was  reduced  while  spawning,  and  had  to  be  made  up  again. 

We  show  a  print  of  the  scales  of  this  fish  (Fig.  43),  which  is 
very  interesting.  Before  going  down  to  the  sea  as  a  smolt  it  would 
have  the  usual  number  of  rings  on  the  scale,  viz.  32.  While  in  the  sea 
it  put  on  43  rings,  but  during  the  four  months  it  was  up  the  river  no 
further  increase  took  place.  From  its  second  return  to  the  sea  in 
March  until  its  capture,  other  20  rings  were  added.  If  5  be  added  for 
the  time  the  fish  was  in  fresh  water  we  get  100;  now  divide  this  by 
1 6  and  it  gives  6  and  4  over,  which,  according  to  my  i6-rings-a-year 
principle,  gives  6^  years,  which,  as  we  already  know,  is  the  exact  age 
of  the  fish.  The  age  can  also  be  ascertained  by  noting  the  winter  and 
summer  marks  on  the  scales,  but  as  marks  are  made  during  summer 
and  resemble  winter  marks,  it  is  not  reliable  and  constantly  leads  to 
mistakes.  The  counting  of  the  rings,  therefore,  is  by  far  the  most 
reliable  way  of  telling  the  age  of  a  fish  and  the  time  of  its  coming 
from  and  going  to  the  sea.  I  have  on  many  occasions  proved  this  by 
marking  fish  at  various  times. 

On  8th  July  1909  we  got  another  wired  fish  of  the  same  marking, 
a  female  of  28^  Ibs.  It  had  returned  to  the  river  and  gone  to  the  sea 
at  the  same  time  as  the  last  one,  but  had  come  up  the  river  again 
three  days  later.  On  examining  the  scales  I  find  the  numbers  at  the 
various  stages  to  be  32,  43,  20;  and  adding  5  for  the  time  it  spent  in 
fresh  water  we  have  again  the  total  of  100.  Another  marked  fish, 
weighing  36  Ibs.,  captured  on  2nd  August,  had  the  same  number  of 
rings.  Besides  these  three  fish  we  have,  during  the  last  few  days, 
been  capturing  others  similar  that  have  not  been  marked. 

HABITS  OF  THE  SALMON 

Salmon  run  at  all  seasons  of  the  year.  In  large  rivers  like  the 
Tay  the  clean  winter  or  spring  fish  begin  to  run  early  in  October. 
They  do  not  spawn  until  the  following  year,  thus  being  thirteen 


The  Salmon 

months  in  fresh  water  before  spawning.  They  push  on  to  Loch  Tay 
during  the  winter  and  spring  months,  and  by  the  end  of  March  the 
run  is  nearly  over.  The  average  weight  of  these  spring  fish  is  about 
20  Ibs.,  though  in  some  seasons  they  are  heavier  than  in  others.  A 
number  of  them  remain  in  the  Tay  and  its  tributaries,  the  Tummel, 
the  Lyon,  and  the  Earn,  until  about  the  middle  of  May,  and  give 
good  sport  to  the  angler.  After  this  time  they  nearly  all  proceed  to 
the  higher  reaches.  Those  already  in  Loch  Tay  remain  in  it  until 
about  the  middle  of  May,  but  when  the  snow  begins  to  disappear  from 
the  hills  they  leave  the  loch  and  proceed  up  the  river  Dochart.  By 
this  time  many  of  the  fish  are  of  a  copper  colour.  Most  of  them  will 
have  left  Loch  Tay  by  the  end  of  May,  and  if  there  has  been  sufficient 
water  to  take  them  up  after  entering  the  Dochart  they  gradually 
advance  higher  and  higher,  until  Loch  Dochart  is  reached.  There 
they  remain  until  spawning-time,  after  which  they  leave  the  loch  and 
run  up  the  tributaries.  The  spawning-time  begins  about  the  i5th  of 
November,  and  is  usually  at  its  height  about  the  2Oth  of  November. 
After  spawning  they  become  kelts  ;  and  the  survivors  fall  back  into 
Loch  Dochart,  and  gradually  go  down  the  Dochart  into  Loch  Tay,  and 
thence  down  the  river  Tay  to  the  sea,  a  distance  of  120  miles.  Being 
so  long  in  fresh  water  without  food,  these  fish  are  reduced  to  quite 
half  the  weight  they  were  when  they  first  came  up. 

During  the  winter  months,  if  the  weather  is  cold,  these  fish  travel 
very  slowly,  going  at  the  rate  of  2  to  3  miles  per  day  ;  but  as  the  season 
advances  and  the  weather  becomes  warmer  their  speed  increases,  and 
by  June  they  will  travel  20  miles  per  day.  Towards  the  middle  of  July 
again  they  begin  to  move  more  slowly.  Many  people  wonder  why 
they  run  in  winter  and  spring,  thinking  it  cannot  be  to  spawn,  as  there 
is  little  appearance  of  spawn  in  them.  There  is  little  doubt,  however, 
that  it  is  to  spawn,  and  if  they  did  not  run  in  winter  and  spring  they 
would  not  be  able  to  reach  the  head-waters  in  time,  as  frost  and  high  and 
low  water  would  keep  them  back.  As  it  is,  it  takes  them  almost  their 
whole  time  to  reach  their  destination.  Having  so  much  energy  they  are 
able  to  ascend  falls  and  surmount  obstacles  that  autumn  fish  could  not 


The   Salmon  5i 

do  even  although  possessed  of  the  necessary  energy,  for  the  spawning 
season  would  be  on  them  long  before  they  had  arrived  at  the  upper 
reaches,  and  if  the  river  Dochart  had  to  depend  on  autumn  fish  alone 
none  would  ever  be  got  in  it.  I  have  always  held  the  opinion  that  a 
certain  proportion  of  each  run  of  fish  should  be  allowed  to  pass,  so  that 
all  the  different  parts  of  the  river  would  be  equally  well  stocked.  Until 
recently  there  was  a  large  portion  of  the  Tay  and  a  part  of  the  Lyon  and 
the  Tummel  with  very  few  spawning  fish  on  the  beds  during  winter. 

It  is  a  peculiar  fact  that  as  long  as  the  temperature  of  the  water 
is  low  and  snow  is  in  the  river,  fish  have  a  great  disinclination  to 
surmount  broken  waterfalls  or  weirs.  Few  of  these  fish  are  seen 
trying  to  ascend  them  before  the  middle  of  April.  In  the  river 
Helmsdale  few  fish  are  seen  above  the  falls  before  April.  The  only 
exception  to  this  that  I  have  seen  is  on  the  North  Esk.  On  the 
Morphie  weir  in  February,  before  the  nets  go  on,  sometimes  a  dozen 
clean  fish  can  be  seen  trying  to  ascend  at  one  time,  generally  about 
mid-day,  but  unsuccessfully,  as  each  one  falls  back  again  into  the  pool 
below.  It  is  little  wonder,  however,  that  these  fish  try  to  get  up, 
as  there  are  thousands  of  them  huddled  together  in  one  pool.  They 
collect  here  during  the  whole  of  the  winter,  and  are  all  scooped  out 
when  the  nets  are  put  on.  It  is  difficult  to  imagine  how  this  is 
allowed  to  go  on  year  after  year.  There  is  surely  something  wrong 
when  2  miles  of  this  river  below  the  weir  are  rented  at  about  ^5000, 
and  30  miles  above  the  weir  scarcely  bring  ^500  ! 

The  amount  of  running  fish  do  depends  much  on  wind  and 
weather.  In  cold,  frosty  weather  or  when  the  river  is  full  of  snow  they 
run  very  little.  Ideal  conditions  are  when  the  river  is  free  from  snow 
and  a  good  fresh  wind  is  blowing.  I  have  known  a  strong  west  wind 
take  all  the  fish  from  the  east  end  of  Loch  Tay.  Strange  as  it  may 
appear,  spring  fish  are  unable  to  withstand  a  high  flood,  and  are  some- 
times carried  a  few  miles  down  stream.  Occasionally  big  hauls  of 
them  are  got  with  the  nets  in  quiet  places  to  which  they  have  been 
borne  down.  This  accounts  for  the  fact  that  the  rod-fishing  is  poor  after 
big  floods  in  spring.  Kelts  seem  to  be  able  to  withstand  floods  better 


52  The   Salmon 

than  clean  fish,  for  no  matter  how  many  floods  there  are  the  kelts 
remain  in  the  river  until  they  choose  to  leave,  the  greater  part  of  them 
descending  during  April,  while  from  i5th  April  till  i5th  July  fish 
eagerly  push  forward,  few  remaining  in  tidal  water.  From  1 5th  July  fish 
begin  to  rest  from  6  to  10  miles  above  tidal  water,  each  succeeding 
week  running  more  slowly  and  increasing  in  numbers  in  the  pools,  and 
as  the  season  advances  they  begin  to  rest  in  the  tidal  water  itself.  About 
the  end  of  September,  although  they  are  newly  from  the  salt  water 
and  have  sea-lice  on  them,  they  begin  to  turn  a  little  red  in  colour, 
the  spawn  increases  in  size,  and  they  hurry  forward  with  every  little 
freshet.  By  the  end  of  October  they  begin  to  look  out  for  spawning 
ground,  leave  the  rocky  pools,  and  run  up  the  smaller  streams  and 
burns.  Although  a  few  begin  to  spawn  in  the  beginning  of  November, 
it  is  not  until  the  middle  of  that  month  that  spawning  becomes  general. 
During  spawning  time  the  female  becomes  very  unshapely  and  black, 
and  the  male  red,  orange,  and  black.  Their  noses  become  extended, 
sometimes  to  the  extent  of  three  or  four  inches  ;  the  lower  jaw  also 
lengthens  and  a  large  hook  is  formed  at  the  end  of  it  as  thick  as  a  man's 
finger.  This  fits  into  the  upper  jaw,  and  sometimes  almost  penetrates 
it.  This  extension  of  the  upper  and  the  lower  jaw  prevents  the  mouth 
from  closing,  and  a  large  opening  is  shown  at  each  side  of  the  mouth. 
It  has  not  yet  been  ascertained  what  purpose  this  knob  and  extension 
of  the  upper  jaw  serves.  Some  say  it  is  intended  for  fighting  during 
the  spawning  season  ;  but  it  must  be  a  poor  weapon  of  offence,  as  it 
would  prevent  the  fish's  teeth  from  coming  in  contact  with  its  foe. 
Others  say  the  enlargement  of  the  head  is  for  digging  up  the  gravel ; 
but  this  is  not  the  case,  as  the  male  fish  does  not  dig  up  the  gravel. 
After  spawning  time  this  knob  gradually  decreases  in  size,  and  the 
extended  part  has  again  regained  its  normal  size  by  the  time  the  fish 
has  returned  to  salt  water. 

There  are  many  different  and  erroneous  opinions  as  to  how  fish 
spawn.  Having  been  brought  up  on  the  banks  of  a  river  where  thousands 
of  fish  spawned  every  year,  I  had  ample  opportunity  of  observing  and 
studying  them  almost  every  day  each  winter  for  over  twenty  years. 


The  Salmon 


53 


About  the  middle  of  November  they  leave  the  pools  and  come  on  to 
the  streams.      Here  they  select  a  bank  composed  of  sand  and  gravel 


3- 


<U 

O 


to 

0) 
4= 


t/J 

C 


B 

'5 


C 
O 

O 

S 

"5 

C/3 


a 


C 


which  is  not  very  liable  to   shift   throughout  the  season.      Here  the 
female  digs  into  the  gravel  with  her  tail  (Fig.  44),  turns  on  her  side, 


54 


The  Salmon 


and  gives  a  few  scoops  among  the  gravel,  turning  it  up  with  each  move- 
ment and  making  the  water  quite  dirty.      The  spawn,  which  is  being 


>---r-i  &^&p££&&ri£st 


Photo  by  If.  Anderson. 


FIG.  45. — Salmon  Spawning-Bed  on  the  Tay. 


FIG.  46. — Salmon  Spawning-Bed  (enlarged). 


deposited  all  the  time,  falls  to  the  bottom  and  is  covered  up  with  each 
stroke.    This  process  is  renewed  every  five  or  ten  minutes,  the  fish  work- 


The  Salmon 


55 


ing  upstream  all  the  time.  If  the  gravel  is  easy  to  work,  the  spawning- 
bed  thus  scooped  out  is  often  a  foot  deep  ;  and  by  the  time  spawning 
is  completed  the  fish  will  have  turned  up  the  gravel  to  the  extent  of 
2  to  3  yards  upstream,  and  about  2  feet  across  stream  (Fig.  45).  The 
spawning-beds  can  always  be  detected  by  observing  the  light  colour 
of  the  gravel  which  has  been  newly  exposed,  contrasted  against  the 


FIG.  47. — Showing  Salmon-Beds  diverting  the  water  where  the  gravel  is  raised, 

River  Duart  More,  Sutherland. 

darker-coloured  part  on  each  side  (Fig.  46).  The  whole  process  of 
depositing  the  spawn  in  the  gravel  to  the  depth  of  10  or  1 2  inches  occupies 
from  three  to  fourteen  days,  according  to  the  state  of  the  weather  and 
the  water.  So  eager  are  fish  to  spawn  in  their  own  river  that  I  have 
observed  them  begin  five  minutes  after  entering.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  they  are  prevented  from  spawning  by  being  delayed  in  pools 
during  low  water,  they  retain  their  spawn  for  weeks  longer  than  they 
would  have  done  had  the  water  been  suitable  for  their  reaching  the 


The  Salmon 


spawning  ground.     Very  often  one  fish  begins  to  spawn  where  another 
left  off,  and  one  follows  another  in  this  way  until  the  spawning-bed  is 


efl 

j-i 

<u 


= 

'c 


in 

i* 
<u 


0 


ri 

£ 

D 


C 
rt 

o 

3 


o 


c! 
CA1 


20  or  30  yards  long.      While   the  female  is  working,  the  male,  if  un- 
disturbed, remains  beside  her,  and  occasionally  pushes  her  sideways 


The   Salmon 


57 


off  the  bed  for  a  second  or  two  (Fig.  48).      If  another  male  come  near, 


t 


o 


to 

c 

'c 


C 
O 


however,  he  rushes  after  him  with  his  mouth  wide  open.     Although  this 

is  repeated  each  time  an  intruder  comes  near,  they  seldom  take  hold 

8 


The  Salmon 


of  each  other.  On  carefully  examining  a  bed  after  a  fish  has  spawned, 
or  when  it  is  spawning,  one  may  see  a  considerable  quantity  of  spawn  at 
the  lower  end  of  the  bed,  uncovered  with  gravel.  This  may  be  either 
washed  away  by  the  first  flood,  or  eaten  up  by  trout  or  sea-trout. 

Conditions  of  weather  and  water  have  a  great  effect  on  salmon  as 
regards  spawning.     A  night's  frost  is  the  best  thing  to  hasten  spawn- 


FlG.  50. — Showing  Salmon  Spawning-Beds  on  River  Almond.     November  1905. 

ing  ;  while  if  a  freshet  come  on,  even  although  a  fish  has  begun  to 
spawn,  it  will  leave  its  bed  and  go  higher  up  and  begin  a  new  one. 
Fish  may  be  seen  spawning  at  any  time  of  the  day  or  night,  but  they 
are  most  active  from  sundown  till  midnight,  when  they  usually  leave 
off  and  fall  back  into  the  pools.  Sometimes,  if  the  river  is  very  low, 
they  move  up  to  the  spawning-beds  as  soon  as  darkness  sets  in.  At 
such  a  time  their  backs  may  be  discerned  above  water,  and  you  may 
hear  the  flop,  flop  of  the  female  every  time  she  turns  on  her  side 


The   Salmon  59 

(Fig.  49).  Grilse  often  spawn  with  salmon,  sea-trout  with  grilse,  and 
trout  with  sea-trout,  in  a  season  favourable  for  fish  running  up. 

Most  of  the  spawning  is  over  by  the  end  of  December,  although 
after  a  severe  winter  I  have  seen  salmon  spawning  in  March.  If  a 
fish  exceeds  the  time  for  spawning  it  becomes  bright  in  colour  in  the 
same  way  as  the  kelts  do,  and  is  then  called  a  "  rawner "  (Fig.  51). 
Rawners  are  sometimes  got  in  the  middle  of  summer,  but  I  have 
never  been  able  to  see  one  of  these  fish  attempt  to  spawn.  As  the 
bright  colour  comes  on,  too,  they  improve  in  condition.  One  can  always 
tell  whether  they  are  rawners  by  holding  them  up  by  the  tail,  for  then 
the  spawn  will  run  towards  the  head.  After  the  male  and  the  female 
have  completed  the  process  of  spawning  they  fall  back  into  the  pools, 
and  many  of  them,  more  especially  the  males,  become  sick  and  die. 
The  mortality  during  the  first  month  after  spawning  is  greater  than  in 
any  other  month  of  the  year.  During  a  heavy  flood  many  of  them  are 
carried  down,  lose  control  of  themselves,  and  soon  die,  and  can  be 
seen  in  thousands  cast  up  along  the  banks  of  most  of  our  rivers.  The 
survivors,  if  they  do  not  at  once  return  to  the  sea,  remain  in  the  pools 
from  three  to  four  months,  assume  a  silvery  dress,  and  become  as  strong 
as  clean  fish  before  they  return  to  the  sea.  In  small  rivers  and  the 
head-waters  of  large  ones  fish  often  return  to  the  sea  as  soon  as  they 
have  completed  spawning.  Most  of  the  fish,  however,  go  down  in 
March  and  April.  A  little  freshet  takes  them  down  in  large  numbers, 
and  in  some  seasons,  when  the  river  is  so  low  that  they  are  pre- 
vented from  getting  down,  they  remain  in  the  river  all  summer. 

When  kelts  are  in  poor  condition  they  are  easily  known  from 
clean  fish,  but  as  the  season  advances  and  they  improve  in  shape  and 
colour  it  is  more  difficult  to  tell  them.  They  nearly  always  have  a 
few  maggots  in  their  gills,  their  fins  and  tails  are  usually  ragged  and 
larger  than  those  of  a  clean  fish,  and  the  vent  always  protrudes. 
Kelts  out  of  condition  are  not  fit  for  food,  but  what  the  fishermen 
call  "  well-mended  kelts "  before  they  return  to  the  sea  are  much 
better  for  eating  than  a  dark-coloured  fish  caught  in  October.  In 
describing  the  scales  I  will  show  how  one  may  tell  at  a  glance  whether 


6o 


The  Salmon 


a  fish  is  a   kelt  or  a  clean   fish.      Anglers   are  often   in  doubt    as    to 
whether  fish  they  have  caught  are  clean   or  not,  and   this  is  not  to  be 


•-C 

c 


in 

a 


t/o 


<U 

C 


CO 


B 
O 

Q 
I) 


0) 

c 


to 
M 

53 

— 
"rt 

u 


cS 

O 
4J 


O 

43 


G 
> 
rt 


rt 


wondered  at,  as  those  who  are  constantly  among  them  sometimes  make 
mistakes  when  judging  from  the  outward  appearance  only. 


The   Salmon 


61 


The  size  of  fish  in  the  different  rivers  varies  very  much,  and 
so  does  the  time  in  which  they  run  into  them.  In  the  Tay  the 
spring  fish  average  over  20  Ibs.,  while  in  the  Aberdeenshire  Dee 
they  are  under  half  this  weight.  In  the  Dee,  again,  the  fish  which 
run  in  autumn  are  much  larger.  Some  rivers  have  no  spring  run, 
and  some  of  the  tributaries  of  early  rivers  have  no  run  of  fish  till 
the  autumn.  This  being  so,  anglers  should  be  careful  when  renting 
a  river  to  know  when  the  run  takes  place.  Many  are  disappointed 
when  they  rent  a  river  in  autumn  to  find  there  are  only  spring  fish  in 
it,  which  do  not  take  well  and  are  not  worth  catching.  In  the 
Aberdeenshire  Dee  the  average  weight  is  about  7  Ibs.  They  are 
young-looking  and  have  the  appearance  of  maiden  fish  with  their 
forked  tail  and  long,  small  heads. 

TABLE  SHOWING  THE  NUMBER  OF  RlNGS  PUT  ON  THE  SCALES  OF 
PARR,  SMOLT,  GRILSE,  AND  SALMON 


1907 


No.  of 

Date. 

Rings. 

Da 

April 

i,   1903 

0 

July 

5» 

55 

i,   1904 

.      16 

,, 

28 

)1 

i,   1905 

.      32 

Aug. 

20 

55 

i,   1906 

48 

Sept. 

12 

,, 

24 

49 

Oct. 

5 

May 

17 

•      5° 

,, 

28 

June 

9 

•      51 

Nov. 

20 

July 

2 

•      52 

Dec. 

13 

55 

25 

•      53 

Jan. 

5, 

Aug. 

17 

•      54 

,, 

28 

Sept. 

9 

•      55 

Feb. 

20 

Oct. 

O 

.      56 

Mar. 

'5 

„ 

25 

•      57 

April 

T 

Nov. 

17 

.      58 

,, 

3° 

Dec. 

10 

•      59 

May 

23 

Jan. 

2,    1907 

60 

June 

15 

51 

2  c 

.      61 

July 

8 

Feb. 

17 

.      62 

,, 

31 

Mar. 

I  2 

.      63 

Aug. 

23 

April 

4 

.      64 

Sept. 

18 

,, 

2  7 

.     65 

Oct. 

8 

May 

20 

.      66 

,, 

3i 

June 

I  2 

.      67 

Nov. 

23 

1908 


No.  of 
Rings. 

Date. 

No.  of 

Rings. 

68 

Dec. 

1  6,   1908    . 

91 

69 

Jan. 

8,   1909    . 

92 

70 

)> 

31 

93 

71 

Feb. 

23 

94 

72 

Mar. 

18 

95 

73 

April 

10 

96 

74 

May 

8 

97 

75 

)> 

26 

98 

76 

June 

18 

99 

77 

July 

i  i 

IOO 

78 

Aug. 

3 

IOI 

79 

» 

26 

IO2 

80 

Sept. 

18 

I03 

Si 

Oct. 

1  1 

104 

82 

Nov. 

3 

ios 

33 

5? 

26 

1  06 

84 

Dec. 

19 

07 

«5 

Jan. 

11,1910    . 

08 

86 

Feb. 

i 

o 

09 

87 

)5 

26 

10 

88 

Mar. 

2  I 

1  1 

89 

April 

13 

I  2 

90 

62  The   Salmon 

The  last  number  would  make  a  salmon  seven  years  old  on  its  first 
return  from  the  sea. 


THE  SCALES  OF  SALMON 

The  late  Lord  Blythswood  was  the  first  to  direct  my  attention  to 
the  importance  of  the  study  of  scales.  During  the  year  1902  he  very 
kindly  sent  me  several  enlarged  photographs  of  scales,  which  I  have 
still  in  my  possession,  drawing  my  attention  to  the  contraction  on 
a  grilse  scale.  This,  he  stated,  pointed  to  the  grilse  having  spent 
one  winter  in  the  sea  before  returning  to  fresh  water.  Another 
scale,  showing  three  contractions,  according  to  his  theory,  pointed 
to  that  particular  fish  having  spent  three  winters  in  the  sea  before 
returning. 

Knowing  I  had  the  opportunity  of  obtaining  scales  at  all  times, 
he  was  anxious  that  I  should  put  his  theory  to  the  test.  Although 
I  had  the  idea  that  Lord  Blythswood  was  correct  in  his  assumption, 
it  still  remained  to  be  proved  by  practical  experiment.  This  I  im- 
mediately set  about  doing,  and  devised,  after  much  trouble,  to  mark 
the  delicate  smolt,  so  that  it  would  return  in  all  its  stages  with 
the  mark  still  attached.  Up  to  that  time  the  marking  of  smolts 
had  been  done  in  a  most  unsatisfactory  and  unsuccessful  manner ; 
and  not  until  this  mark  was  devised  could  any  reliable  information 
be  obtained. 

Success  attended  my  efforts  ;  and  on  comparing  a  scale  taken  from 
the  first  marked  grilse  with  that  of  the  enlarged  photo  given  me  by 
Lord  Blythswood,  I  found  one  contraction,  proving  clearly  that  his 
theory  was  correct.  As  the  season  advanced  more  marked  fish  came 
forward,  and  the  older  the  grilse  the  more  lines  could  be  counted  on 
the  scales.  Later  on  came  the  small  spring  fish,  succeeded  by  the 
autumn  fish,  each  run  showing  two  contractions. 

Still  later  came  the  large  spring  fish,  showing  three  distinct  con- 
tractions on  their  scales.  On  comparing  the  latter  with  the  other 
enlarged  photo  given  me  by  Lord  Blythswood,  I  found  the  scales 


The  Salmon  63 

exactly  the  same,  having  an  equal  number  of  lines  and  contractions, 
denoting  they  had  spent  three  winters  in  the  sea.  The  marking  of 
the  smolts  thus  clearly  proved  what  Lord  Blythswood  wished  to  point 
out,  that  each  contraction  denoted  the  number  of  winters  spent  in 
the  sea. 

This  being  known,  the  subsequent  reading  of  the  scales  was  com- 
paratively easy.  If  reference  be  made  to  Figs.  80  and  81  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  former  had  been  a  year  longer  in  the  sea,  had  grown 
to  35  Ibs.,  and  had  more  lines  on  its  scale  than  the  latter,  which 
had  attained  the  weight  of  18  Ibs.,  and  yet  both  are  of  the  same 
age,  namely,  five  years.  See  also  Fig.  43  (26^  Ibs.,  6^  years  old), 
and  two  others  caught  in  our  nets  with  my  marks  intact.  These 
are  the  only  authentic  records  in  existence  of  smolts  having  been 
marked  and  caught  on  their  second  return  from  the  sea.  During  the 
whole  of  the  following  season  a  strict  watch  was  kept  for  marked 
fish,  but  none  were  forthcoming,  showing  the  supply  had  become 
exhausted. 

My  marks,  however,  had  served  their  purpose  wrell,  and  added 
much  to  our  knowledge  of  the  salmon,  far  beyond  our  fondest  dreams. 
Lately  I  have  been  devoting  a  great  deal  of  time  to  examining  the 
scales  of  fish,  in  order  to  find  out  what  percentage  of  those  caught  are 
on  their  second  return,  and  also  to  ascertain  the  number  of  lines  put 
on  when  in  the  sea. 

A  careful  record  has  been  kept  during  each  season  and  month,  but 
unfortunately  last  year  (1911)  was  so  very  dry  that  fish  were  unable  to 
push  forward  in  numbers  sufficient  for  my  purpose.  To  give  the  per- 
centage for  any  one  year,  however,  I  think  would  be  quite  misleading, 
as  the  large  fish  cease  when  the  small  spring  fish  begin  to  increase  in 
numbers. 

Each  succeeding  month  also  shows  a  big  divergence,  double  the 
number  of  small  spring  fish  being  caught  in  March  than  in  February, 
and  the  same  rate  of  increase  goes  on  until  May,  when  the  numbers 
begin  to  decrease.  Then,  again,  we  have  some  seasons  only  yielding 
one-third  the  number  of  small  spring  fish  that  others  yield  ;  therefore, 


64  The   Salmon 

to  give  the  percentage  caught  on  their  second  and  third  return  would 
not  be  of  any  great  value.  What  I  have  said  above  also  applies  to 
the  autumn  fish.  In  my  opinion,  in  order  to  form  a  correct  idea,  one 
would  require  to  keep  a  record  extending  over  a  period  of  ten  years. 
The  number  of  fish  returning  for  the  second  and  third  time  caught  in 
the  nets  on  the  Tay  from  5th  February  1911  to  2Oth  August  was  872. 
Of  that  number  46  were  got  in  February,  26  in  March,  15  in  April, 
20  in  May,  51  in  June,  323  in  July,  and  391  from  ist  August  until  the 
nets  went  off  on  the  2Oth  of  that  month. 

In  a  good  season  double  this  number  are  caught  in  the  nets, 
and  more  than  double  left  in  the  river,  besides  those  caught  by 
the  rod.  This  would  mean  at  least  4500  of  these  fish  returning  a 
second  and  third  time,  showing  that  the  much-despised  kelt  is  worth 
protecting. 

It  also  shows  the  fallacy  of  the  old  theory  that  if  you  kill  all  the 
kelts  you  will  have  no  large  salmon,  for  many  of  the  latter  are  on  their 
first  return  from  the  sea,  and  have  not  yet  spawned.  It  will  be  seen 
from  what  I  have  written  above  that  to  take  and  examine  a  few 
hundred,  or  it  may  be  a  few  thousand  scales  from  fish  at  intervals 
throughout  the  season,  and  give  the  percentage,  conveys  no  real 
meaning.  In  my  first  addition  I  made  out  that  in  the  autumn  as  many 
as  19  per  cent  had  returned  a  second  and  third  time,  figures  arrived 
at  by  counting  the  fish  twice  daily  during  several  weeks.  From  closer 
observation,  this  does  not  give  the  true  percentage,  as  I  did  the  same 
last  July  (1911)  when  fish  were  scarce,  and  found  the  numbers  far 
more  than  19  per  cent — in  fact,  some  days  quite  34  per  cent.  To 
arrive  at  the  true  percentage,  one  collecting  scales  would  require  to 
examine  every  fish  coming  into  our  fish-house  twice  daily  throughout 
the  whole  season.  This  would  be  found  quite  impracticable,  especially 
when  a  big  run  of  fish  had  to  be  dealt  with,  as  thousands  would  require 
to  be  examined  daily.  One  can,  however,  overcome  this  difficulty  by 
picking  out  the  fish  that  have  spawned  from  their  outward  appearance, 
and  if  any  uncertainty  exist,  the  gills  can  be  examined  for  maggots, 
wrhich  are  always  present. 


The   Salmon  65 

If  we,  then,  wish  to  refer  to  the  scales,  it  is  an  easier  matter 
to  deal  with  from  4  per  cent  to  20  per  cent  than  to  go  over  the  whole 
morning  or  afternoon's  catch  as  the  case  may  be.  The  small  spring 
fish  which  begin  to  run  in  January,  and  cease  about  the  middle  of 
June,  or  perhaps  a  little  later  if  unable  to  push  forward,  are  all  of  the 
same  age,  namely,  4  to  4^  years.  The  autumn  run  of  fish  of  the  same 
age  takes  place  about  the  I5th  July,  and  the  spring  run  from  the 
beginning  of  November,  and  continues  into  May. 

With  experience  one  can  quite  well  tell  from  outward  appearance 
the  age  of  these  fish,  without  having  to  refer  to  their  scales. 

For  a  considerable  time  I  made  little  headway  with  the  study  of 
scales,  until  I  found  out  from  the  parr  and  the  smolt  the  number  of  lines 
added  to  their  scales  in  a  year.  This  supplied  me  with  a  key  to  Lord 
Blythswood's  explanation,  so  that  after  collecting  scales  from  all  the 
different  runs  of  fish,  and  at  all  seasons  of  the  year  for  several  years, 
I  was  able  to  tell  to  within  a  month  how  long  a  fish  had  been  in 
the  sea,  and,  of  course,  when  it  went  down  as  a  kelt,  and  whether 
it  was  a  grilse,  small  spring  fish,  autumn  fish,  or  large  spring  fish. 
I  could  also  tell  its  age  and  its  weight,  and  whether  it  had  spawned 
once  or  twice.  This  being  so,  I  consider  a  study  of  the  scales  the 
most  important  means  of  determining  the  life-history  of  the  salmon 
and  the  sea-trout. 

The  study  of  scales  is  a  very  wide  subject,  but  I  shall  endeavour 
to  condense  my  remarks  as  much  as  possible.  Just  as  the  age  of  a 
tree  may  be  determined  by  counting  the  number  of  rings  on  a  cross- 
section  of  the  trunk,  where  each  ring  shows  the  growth  of  one  year, 
so  the  age  of  the  parr  may  be  arrived  at  by  counting  the  rings  or 
lines  on  its  scales.  The  parr  in  a  natural  state,  however,  adds  to 
its  scale  each  year  not  one  ring  only  but  sixteen,  and  this  goes 
on  throughout  all  the  life -history  of  the  salmon  as  long  as  it 
continues  to  feed  and  grow.  In  the  parr  fewer  rings  are  put  on 
during  the  winter  months  than  during  the  summer  months,  but  if  we 
take  a  whole  year  the  number  works  out  as  I  have  said,  with  very 
few  exceptions.  I  choose  a  year  to  calculate  from,  because  if  a  fish 

9 


66 


The   Salmon 


has  rich  feeding  and  has  grown  to  a  considerable  size  it  may  have  as 
many  as  twelve  rings  on  its  scales  when  it  is  only  six  months  old  ;  but 
notwithstanding  this,  in  March,  when  it  is  a  year  old,  it  will  only 


FlG.  53. — April  1905. 


FIG.  54  — i  oz.     August  1904. 


FlG.  55.—  i 


oz.      Stormontfield  Ponds. 
March  1908. 


Fir,    56.  —  ij  oz.      April  1905. 


have  sixteen  (Fig.  53).  I  reckon  from  March,  the  time  the  fry  are 
hatched,  and  will  keep  to  this  month  all  through.  If,  then,  a  parr  is 
hatched  in  March  1903  its  scales  will  have  sixteen  rings  by  March 
1904  (Fig.  54),  and  thirty-two  by  March  1905  (Fig.  55).  It  becomes 
a  smolt  soon  after,  and  goes  down  to  the  sea  at  the  age  of  two  years 
and  one  or  two  months  (Fig.  56).  We  see  nothing  more  of  these 


The   Salmon 


F'r-  57-  —  l£  Ibs.     4th  May  1907. 
North  Esk. 


smolts  until   they  return  as  grilse  in   May  or  June  of  the  following 

year,  or  it   may  be   two  to  six   months 

later.       If,    then,    a    smolt    returns    on 

ist    June,    after    being    one    year    and 

two    months    in    the    sea,    how    many 

rings    should     it     have    on    its    scales  ? 

On  examining  the  scale  we  find  there 

are    fifty-one    rings    on    it :     the    same 

result  would    have    been    got    by   mul- 
tiplying   the     age     of    the     fish-  -3^ 

years — by    16,    the     number    of    rings 

which    are   added    each    year.       I    here 

take    ist   June,    because    this   was    the 

date    on    which    our    first    wired    grilse 

was    caught    from    those    which    were 

marked  the  year  before. 

I  give  enlarged  photo- 
graphs (Figs.  57  to  63)  of 
scales  from  wired  grilse, 
taken  each  month,  which 
clearly  show  the  number  of 
rings  as  the  season  advances. 
I  have  also  made  out  a  table 
showing  the  number  of  rings 
on  the  scales  at  the  different 
ages.  This  table  will  be 
found  to  be  fairly  accurate, 
taking  one  month  with 
another.  There  may  be  a 
difference  of  one  or  two 
rings  according  to  the  feed- 
ing in  the  sea  being  better 

in    some    months    than    others ;     but    if   more    rings    than    usual    are 

added    during    any    one    month,    the    fewer    are    added    in     some    of 


* 


FIG.  58. — 2\  Ibs.      4th  May  1906.      North  Esk. 


68 


The   Salmon 


FIG.  59. — 3  Ibs.      ist  June  1905. 

of  the  same  age.  Very 
few  of  the.  latter,  however, 
are  to  be  met  with  during 
November  ;  besides,  a  spring 
fish  would  be  readily  known 
without  reference  to  its 
scales. 

As  a  rule,  the  greatest 
number  of  rings  a  grilse 
has  is  fifty-nine  or  sixty; 
although,  of  course,  there 
may  be  a  few  exceptions, 
in  the  case,  for  example, 
of  a  parr  that  did  not  be- 
come a  smolt  until  it  was 
three  years  old,  or  one  that 
became  a  smolt  at  the 
age  of  one  year,  as  some 


the  others.  This  difference  in 
the  number  of  lines  during 
the  different  months,  however, 
is  hardly  worth  considering 
when  it  comes  to  longer 
periods.  No  mistake  need, 
therefore,  be  made  in  dis- 
tinguishing between  a  grilse  and 
a  salmon,  for  one  has  only  to 
count  the  number  of  lines  on 
the  scales  by  the  aid  of  a 
small  magnifying  glass.  If  the 
number  is  less  than  fifty-eight 
it  is  a  grilse.  The  only  other 
fish  that  can  approach  this 
number  is  a  small  spring  fish 


FIG.  60.— Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905. 
Caught  26th  June  1906.     5i  Ibs. 


The   Salmon 


LT] 

o 


•y. 

VI 

rt 


t/J 


X) 


O 
O^ 


o 

p 

•Si 

in 

rt 


'    ' 


•s. 

c. 


CO 

2 

0) 

M 


•8 


00 


The   Salmon 


maintain  they  do.  This  must  be  entirely  exceptional,  as  I  have 
seldom  found  it  in  natural-bred  smolts  from  which  I  have  obtained 
my  information.  The  scales  I  studied  were  mostly  taken  from 
smolts  caught  in  the  tidal  water,  and  these  were  true  smolts  pro- 
ceeding towards  the  sea.  I  have  also  taken  scales  from  smolts 


Fie.  63.  —  io|  Ibs.      iSth  August  1906.      Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905. 

40  miles  from  the  sea  and  found  no  difference  in  them.  Many  parr 
migrate  to  the  sea  long  before  the  real  silvery  coat  comes  on  them, 
so  that  it  is  difficult  to  tell  whether  they  would  become  smolts  that 
season  or  not.  All  parr  and  even  trout  in  April  and  May  become 
quite  silvery,  almost  like  smolts.  In  fact,  quite  as  great  a  change  takes 
place  in  the  parr  when  passing  from  its  winter  to  its  summer  dress 
as  that  which  takes  place  when  changing  from  the  parr  to  the  smolt 
stage.  Smolts  that  are  confined  in  fresh  water  after  assuming 


The   Salmon 


their  silvery  coat,  continue  to  add   rings  to  their  scales  just  as  those 
in  the  sea  do. 

I  have  never  found  a  grilse  in  the  Tay  with  a  less  number  of  rings 
than  fifty-one,   showing  clearly    that    smolts  do  not  return  the  same 
year   as    they  go  down.      All   the  grilse  that  come   up  from   June  to 
December  spawn,  and  those  that  are  long  in  fresh  water  have  both 
edges  of  the  scales  broken  off,  and  by  the  time  they  go  down  as  kelts 
are    very     much     impaired. 
I    have    known   as    many  as 
six   or   eight    rings    become 
detached,    the    upper    edge 
remaining    as    it    was   when 
the  fish  came  from  the  sea. 
When  the  kelt  grilse  enters 
the  sea  and  begins  to  feed, 
it     at     once     forms     a     ring 
round    the    broken    part    as 
well    as    round    the    whole 
part,    and    these    rings    in- 
crease in  number  according 
to  the  time  the  fish  remains 
in    the    sea.       To    find    the 
time     the     fish     has     spent 
in    the    sea,  then,  we    have 
merely  to  count  the  number 
of  complete  rings  from  the  broken  part  outwards  (Fig.  64). 

For  example,  a  grilse  of  7  Ibs.  weight  was  caught  in  August  1906, 
and  its  scales  contained  fifty-four  rings.  It  spawned,  and  went  dowrn 
a  kelt  of  4  Ibs.  on  ist  April  1907,  and  was  caught  again  on  i/th 
August  1907,  weighing  9  Ibs.  The  number  of  rings  it  had  added  from 
ist  April  to  i  7th  August  was  seven,  making  the  total  number  of  rings 
sixty-one.  Its  age,  therefore,  is  four  years  and  live  months.  Had  it 
remained  in  the  sea  a  whole  year,  it  would  have  added  sixteen  rings, 
and  would  have  weighed  about  15  Ibs.  In  calculating  the  age  from 


FIG.  64. — 7  Ibs.      2Oth  July  1907. 


The   Salmon 


the  number  of  rings  one  must  be  careful  to  remember  that  while  grilse 
and  salmon  are  in  fresh  water  no  addition  to  the  number  of  rings  takes 
place.  On  examining  the  scale  carefully  where  the  new  rings  join  on 
to  the  old,  we  find  a  dark  line  round  the  plain  part  of  the  scale.  This 
is  where  the  new  ring  begins. 


FIG.  65.  — 10  Ibs.      igth  February  1907. 

During  winter,  when  the  fish  is  in  the  sea,  the  rings  become  con- 
tracted, and  this  is  caused,  I  think,  by  the  food-supply  becoming  scarcer 
during  the  cold  weather.  This  dark  mark  must  not  be  confused  with 
the  dark  mark  that  is  made  while  the  fish  is  in  fresh  water,  caused 
by  the  breaking  of  the  scales,  which  takes  place  every  time  the 
iish  returns  to  fresh  water,  and  is  afterwards  clearly  shown  on  the 
scale.  It  is,  however,  seldom  seen  more  than  three  times.  Every 


The   Salmon  73 

time  a  fish  comes  into  fresh  water,  it  is  for  the  purpose  of  spawning  ; 
so  that  if  a  fish  comes  from  the  sea  three  times,  it  spawns  three  times. 
The  great  majority,  however,  only  spawn  once.  On  examining  all  the 
scales  of  the  marked  grilse  and  spring  fish,  I  find  that  the  contracting 
of  the  rings  generally  takes  place  in  January  or  February,  and 
occasionally  in  March.  In  April,  again,  they  widen  out,  and  the  width 
continues  to  become  greater  during  the  summer  and  autumn  months. 

By  referring  to  some  of  the  photographs  the  reader  will  observe 
when  a  fish  has  spawned  as  a  grilse,  gone  down  as  a  kelt,  and  come 
up  as  a  clean  salmon.  Count  the  number  of  rings  that  have  been  put 
on  from  the  time  it  was  marked  to  the  time  it  returned,  and  refer  to 
the  number  and  weight  of  the  fish  (Fig.  65).  Due  allowance  must,  of 
course,  be  made  for  kelts  lingering  in  the  river  after  being  marked. 
The  time  need  not  be  extended  beyond  the  ist  of  May,  as  most  kelts 
have  disappeared  by  that  time.  In  almost  every  instance  you  will  tell, 
within  a  few  weeks,  the  time  the  fish  has  been  in  the  sea. 

I  will  now  deal  with  the  scales  of  small  spring  fish  which  are  of 
the  same  age  as  the  grilse  of  the  previous  year,  and  will  confine  my 
remarks  to  fish  marked  by  us,  including  the  autumn  run  as  well. 
The  first  one  caught  was  on  iSth  February  1907,  and  its  weight 
was  9^  Ibs.  (Fig.  66).  Now  if  this  grilse,  caught  on  ist  June  1906, 
had  fifty-one  rings  on  its  scales,  how  many  should  this  February  fish 
have  ?  The  answer  is  sixty-two.  Now  at  the  same  date  the  kelt  of 
the  grilse  of  the  same  age  has  only  fifty-one.  This  kelt  grilse,  being 
on  its  way  to  the  sea,  will  add  another  sixteen  rings  if  it  remain  in 
the  sea  for  a  year;  so  that  when  the  spring  fish  of  iSth  February  is 
returning  to  the  sea  as  a  kelt,  the  kelt  grilse  will  be  going  up  the  river 
as  a  clean  fish,  and  will  now  have  sixty-seven  rings  on  its  scale,  five 
more  than  the  iSth  February  spring  fish  kelt  which  is  going  down. 
The  last  marked  fish  we  got  of  the  same  age  was  caught  on  i9th 
September  1907,  and  the  number  of  rings  on  its  scale  was  seventy-two 
(Fig.  77).  From  the  enlarged  photographs  of  the  scales  taken  each 
month,  it  will  be  seen,  in  addition  to  the  number  of  rings  put  on  each 

month,  where  the  lines  are  contracted  in  some  cases,  and  also  where 

10 


74 


The   Salmon 


they  widen  out  again  during  the  summer.  No  river-mark  appears  in 
these  scales,  because  the  fish  have  not  been  in  fresh  water  since  they 
descended  as  smolts. 

To  many  it  may  seem  strange  that  a  grilse  the  same  age  as  this 


FIG.  66.  — gi  Ibs.      i8th  February  1907.     Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905. 

February  spring  fish  can  be  8,  10,  or  12  Ibs.  weight  in  August  the 
previous  year,  and  this  spring  fish,  after  having  six  months  more 
feeding  in  the  sea,  is  yet  of  less  weight.  It  seems  equally  strange 
why  a  fish  the  same  age  as  the  grilse  caught  on  Qth  August 
weighed  27  Ibs.  Knowing  these  things,  we  need  not  wonder  at  a  fish 
being  caught  over  40  Ibs.  in  another  year.  We  have  no  way  of 
knowing  what  the  weight  of  the  grilse  that  came  up  in  the  autumn 


The   Salmon 


75 


o 

ON 


O 
Ui 

a 


00 


00 


A 

^5 


< 

-c 


76 


The  Salmon 


would  be  on  the  ist  of  June,  but  we  have  every  reason  to  believe 
it  would  be  of  the  same  weight  as  those  coming  up  in  June  ;  and 
owing  to  the  growth  being  greater  in  summer  than  in  winter, 
twice  as  much  weight  is  added  during  the  former  season.  This  is 
seen  all  through  their  life-history.  The  grilse  are  small  when  they 


FIG.  69.  —  loj  Ibs.      I5th  March  1907. 


first  appear  in  summer,  but  by  the  end  of  autumn  they  have 
increased  to  four  times  in  weight.  The  same  thing  happens  with 
the  small  spring  run.  They  weigh  about  5  Ibs.  to  begin  with,  and 
go  on  increasing  until  they  are  12  or  13  Ibs.  The  increase  in  weight 
here,  however,  is  not  so  pronounced,  because  this  run  ceases  by  the 
middle  of  June. 

In  the  next  run,  however,  the  weight  increases  much  more  quickly, 


The   Salmon 


77 


o 

ON 


rt 

£ 

*• 
n 


t~- 

O 


O 

ON 


O 
X 


ca 

s 


rt 
S 


The   Salmon 


for  a  fish  of  the  same  age,  caught  on  iSth  July  and  weighing  i8J  Ibs., 
may  be  27  Ibs.  in  August  ;  and  a  winter  fish  may  be  only  15  Ibs.  in 
October,  and  yet  be  30  Ibs.  or  more  by  March.  It  is  quite  easy  to 
distinguish  a  small  spring  fish  kelt  from  a  grilse  kelt  by  the  increase  in 


FIG.  72. — Marked  as  Smolt  May  1905.     Caught  iSth  July  1907.      185  Ibs. 

number  of  rings  on  the  scale,  and  also  by  its  having   two  contractions 
on  the  scale  instead  of  one. 

The  next  run  of  fish  is  the  winter  run,  and  it  begins  on  the  Tay 
in  October  and  continues  till  the  end  of  March.  The  fish  in  this  run 
are  all  clean,  and  do  not  spawn  until  the  next  autumn  ;  and  not  having 
been  in  the  river  before,  they  do  not  show  a  river-mark.  There  are 
seventy-three  lines  on  the  scales  on  28th  October,  and  by  the  end  of 
March  there  are  eighty.  The  scales,  too,  have  three  contractions, 


rt 

s 

"o 


8, 


v. 


' 

Ri\lMVW>\Vtti-*V'£Ni\\\VVSaS3E=-=^E2sSy  •   r*  * -*Tk- 


to. 


.o. 
oo 


o 

ON 


rt 

5 


t/J. 


O 

ci 


OO 


o 


•W/V/iw  j  ir¥/'w///'/:' /•<;•,  /-;?.'?•  ftj?y#7 


o 

[IH 


as,  -  * 

9*   ' 


"  § 

*.  s 


•  .     •  >xs 


\ 


o 

s 


U 


. 
t^     U 

O    ^ 


(U 

^a 


fl 


!— 

T  s 


1 1 


82 


The   Salmon 


showing  that  the  fish  have  been  three  winters   in   the  sea.      They  can 
thus  be  easily  distinguished  from  the  last  run.      The  kelts  from  the 


FlG.  79. — 38^  Ibs.      Ijth  February  1908. 


spring  fish  are  a  little  larger  than  those  of  the  last  run,  but,  of  course, 
they  do  not  become  kelts  until  they  are  a  year  older.  I  have  tried  to 
ascertain  how  much  these  winter  fish  lose  in  weight  while  in  fresh 


NY:.ij»fl-i 

>      V    I 

1    '» 


O 
Os 


rt 
S 


O 


.     O 

oo  c: 

a  s 
M  — 


u 

OJ 


"-* 


••    V  >  \  •  s  -  (^ 
^'^1-,.      - .' 


'fMmwfii'MiL/wff, 


Witi/i'W-  lilrillKIJ.i  t>fQ 

.wt's'fik'  •  -''dp//  >}!"#- 


^r?^^*^^' 


w»3  ?r  ^i^,--:i^u:;;i 

-^K^i:^  -"^  / 


CO 
O 
Os 


3 


4-1 

0) 


S  ^ 

ii    tJD 


O 


d 
oo 


The   Salmon 


The   Salmon  85 

water,  i.e.  from  the  time  a  clean  fish  enters  fresh  water  until  it  returns 
to  the  sea.  Some  of  them  are  a  whole  year  in  fresh  water  before 
spawning,  and,  as  nearly  as  I  can  make  out,  lose  twenty-five  per  cent 


FIG.  84.— 14  Ibs.      27th  March. 

of  their  weight  before  and  after  this  takes  place  ;  so  that  a  fish  of  20 
Ibs.  leaving  the  sea  on  ist  January  1907  is  reduced  to  half  that  weight 
on  its  return  as  a  kelt  on  ist  January  1908.  This  percentage  varies 
with  the  length  of  time  the  fish  is  in  fresh  water,  and  according  to  the 
river  it  frequents. 


86 


The   Salmon 


In    the    Tay,    for    example,    fish    retain     their    good    condition 
much  longer    than    they  do    in    the    Earn,   although   the    latter    is   a 


FIG.  85.  —  40  Ibs. 


May  1906. 


tributary  of  the  former.  In  the  Aberdeenshire  Don  they  remain 
longer  in  condition  than  in  the  Tay ;  while  in  the  Dee,  again, 
the  early  spring  fish  become  quite  thin  and  dark  in  colour  as  the 


The   Salmon 


season  advances.      No  doubt  the  quality  of  the  water  has  something 
to  do  with  this. 

Autumn   fish,   on    the    contrary,    do   not    fall   off  in    condition   so 
readily,   as   their   stay    in    fresh    water   is   of  shorter   duration.      This 


FIG.  86.— 5/i  Ibs.     24th  May  1907.     See  Fig.  128. 

is,  no  doubt,  caused  by  the  fact  that  they  cease  feeding  for  a 
considerable  time  before  leaving  the  sea.  Spring  fish  entering 
Loch  Tay  during  winter,  retain  their  flavour  throughout  the  spring, 
and  are  always  excellent  for  table  use.  The  scales  of  fish  that 
have  been  in  the  river  for  nearly  a  year,  become  very  much  broken 
at  the  edges  before  the  spawning  season  commences,  and  on 


88 


The   Salmon 


returning  again  as  clean  fish  the  joining  of  the  new  rings  to  the 
old  is  much  more  pronounced  than  it  is  on  those  of  the  autumn 
run  ;  many  of  the  latter,  however,  are  so  short  a  time  in  fresh 
water  before  spawning  and  returning  to  the  sea,  that  very  little 
damage  occurs  to  the  scales.  When  they  appear  in  the  river 


'Surr 


S2,!™°"  4  years  1  month 

•w*— T^^^ 


FIG.  87. — Marked  loi-lb.  Kelt,  i6th  March  1906.     Recaptured  clean,  27  Ibs. ,  8th  August  1907. 

again,  it  is  therefore  sometimes  difficult  to  tell  whether  they  have 
been  in  fresh  water  before  or  not.  In  treating  of  fish  falling  off 
in  condition,  I  refer,  of  course,  only  to  fish  that  would  spawn  on 
entering  fresh  water.  Fish  caught  in  the  sea  and  confined  in 
fresh  water,  as  also  barren  fish,  retain  their  silvery  coat  and  their 
good  condition  for  many  months.  Even  at  the  end  of  four 
months  little  difference  in  their  appearance  can  be  detected. 


The   Salmon 


89 


On  22nd  January  1907,  whilst  angling  on  the  Islamouth  beat  of 
the  Tay,  I  caught  twenty-four  kelts,  ninety  per  cent  of  which  had  been 
a  very  short  time  in  the  river.  Their  average  weight  was  about  20 
Ibs.,  and  all  were  dark  in  colour,  some  of  them  red  ;  in  fact,  I  never 
before  saw  fish  in  such  splendid  condition.  I  was  so  struck  with 


FIG.  88.— Marked  as  Kelt,  16  Ibs.,  February  1904.     Recaptured  iSth  June  1905,  34  Ibs. 

their  appearance  that  I  went  back  next  day  and  caught  a  number, 
and  had  them  photographed.  These  photographs  I  reproduce 
(Figs.  82,  83).  No  doubt  these  fish,  caught  a  little  later  in  the 
season,  would  be  known  as  "  well-mended  kelts,"  a  term  often  applied 
to  them  by  anglers.  Being  black  in  colour,  they  are  not,  of  course, 
so  showy  as  silvery  kelts.  The  other  ten  per  cent  were  ordinary  long, 


12 


The   Salmon 


lank,  silvery  kelts.  As  far  as  my  experience  goes  kelts  do  not  increase 
in  weight  during  their  sojourn  in  fresh  water,  although  they  certainly 
become  much  stronger.  Their  silvery  appearance,  however,  deceives 


>,       6  years  ,  3  months 

'        X      X 


FIG.  89. — 40  Ibs.     a6th  June  1907. 


the  eye,  just  as  a  burnished  bar  of  silver  appears  much  larger  to  the 
eye  than  a  tarnished  bar  of  the  same  size. 

The  scale  (Fig.  96)  is  a  very  interesting  one,  as  it  is  taken  Irom 
the  only  male  salmon  I  have  ever  seen  in  our  fish-house  on  its  second 
return  from  the  sea.  Going  down  as  a  smolt,  it  came  up  a  grilse  in 
1910;  descending  as  a  kelt  in  the  spring  of  1911,  it  returned  to  the 


The   Salmon 


FIG.  90. — 47  Ibs.      August  1906.     Shannon.     First  return  from  the  sea. 


92 


The   Salmon 


river  and   was  caught  in  our  nets  on  the  2Oth  August.      This  fish  was 
fresh  from  the  sea,  and  had  sea-lice  clinging  to  it  (see  Fig.  98). 

During  its  sojourn   in   the  sea  ten   rings  were  added  to  the  scale 
beyond  the  kelt-grilse   mark.      The  mortality  amongst  male  fish  enter- 


I*? 

»iSi»h r   w\v  ^  \\-^  *--.= V-;.?3 


'tS^S^Vi.^'         ^   %  6  years  4  »ont,hs 

^Qf:-:     -.••^:^x- 


•:     V.:. 

•vx>  v  ;^v 


r 

4'.& 


fSsJ^ 
g^ 


FIG.  91. — 50  Ibs.      loth  August  1907.      First  return  from  the  sen. 

ing  a  river  must  be  very  great,  few  surviving,  as  I  must  have  examined 
100,000  fish  before  I  came  across  this  specimen. 

The  fish,  Fig.  97,  has  sixty-four  lines  on  its  scale,  making  it  four 
years  old,  two  of  which  have  been  spent  in  the  river  and  the  other 
two  years  in  the  sea.  This  is  one  of  the  smallest  spring  fish  I  have 
noticed  in  our  fish-house.  This  scale  shows  exactly  the  same  number 
of  rings  as  those  from  a  fish  double  the  weight  over  the  same  period. 


The   Salmon 


93 


FIG.  92. — 40  Ibs.     August  1906.      First  return  from  the  sea. 


94 


The   Salmon 


FIG.  93. — 65lbs.     6th  June  1907.      Norway. 


The   Salmon 


95 


Fig.  99  is  a  scale  from  another  small  spring  fish,  more  than 
double  the  weight  of  Fig.  97,  but  having  the  same  number  of  lines 
on  its  scale,  denoting  it  has  spent  two  years  in  fresh  water  and  two 
years  in  the  sea.  Ten  narrow  lines  can  be  discerned  on  the  outer 
portion  of  the  scale,  and  are  known  as  the  winter  mark.  The  latter, 


_ 


FIG.  94.  —Marked  as  Kelt,  u  Ibs.,  I2th  February  1906.     Recaptured  clean,  26  Ibs.,  loth  July  1907. 


however,  must  have  been  added   in   the  autumn,  showing  that  this   is 
not  a  reliable  guide,  as  these  marks  are  put  on  at  various  seasons. 

The  fish,  Fig.  100,  has  been  up  on  two  occasions.  On  the  outer 
margin  of  the  scale  eight  lines  can  be  clearly  seen,  showing  that  this 
fish  had  gone  down  as  a  kelt  in  the  spring.  From  this  contraction  to 
the  next  ten  rings  can  be  counted,  denoting  it  had  done  the  same  the 


96 


The   Salmon 


tX^,  ;  •-. 

/  %  'W 


FIG.  95. — 61  Ibs.      I3th  July  1902.      Tay.      First  return  from  the  sea. 


The   Salmon 


97 


FIG.  96.  —  14-lb.  Male  Salmon.     2Oth  August  1911. 


previous  year.      Had  it  escaped  capture  it  would   have  ascended  the 

river  a  third  time,  spawned, 

and  become  a  kelt. 

The  scale,   Fig.    101,  is 

from  a  female   fish,  and   has 

118   lines.      The    parr   stage 

shows  twenty-eight  lines  ;  to 

this   were   added   sixty   lines 

before    it    came    up    in    the 

autumn.       Returning   to   the 

sea,    it    remained    there    for 

two  years,  when  other  thirty 

lines  were   added,  making  a 

total  of  1 1 8  lines.     If  we  add 

another    ten     lines    for    the 

time    spent    in    fresh    water 

(August   to    March)   we    get 

a  grand  total  of  128  lines,  making 
the  fish  to  be  eight  years  of  age, 
which  few  attain. 

Fig.  1 02  is  a  scale  from  one  of 
our  marked  fish  of  1 2th  February 
1906.  During  the  intervening 
dates  twenty-three  lines  had  been 
added  to  the  scale,  denoting  a 
sojourn  of  seventeen  months  in 
the  sea.  This  fish  went  down  at 
the  age  of  two  years,  having  at 
that  time  thirty-two  small  lines  on 
its  scale. 

The  scale,   Fig.    103,   is  taken 

FIG.  97.-3i-lb.  Small  Spring  Fish.  trQm     a     fish     miir\^^     as    a    ^\t    the 

5th  February  1911. 

previous   year.      From    the   outside 
to    the    kelt    mark    sixteen    rings    can    be    counted,    which    can    be 


98 


The  Salmon 


rt 

11 


o 


O 

u 

ID 

CD 


tfi 


.c 
o 


c 
o 


rt 

C/3 


IX) 

<^ 

O 


The   Salmon 


99 


taken  as  representing  the  number  of  rings  put  on  by  a  fish  each 
year.  It  is  rather  more  difficult  to  count  the  rings  from  the  centre 
outwards  than  vice  versa,  and  for  two  reasons  :  (a)  When  a  parr 
becomes  a  smolt  rings  are  added  outside  the  winter  mark  which  are 
the  same  as  those  put  on  in  the  sea,  and  it  is  almost  impossible  to  tell 
with  certainty  the  last  line  added  when  in  the  river.  This  can  be 
easily  proved  by  confining  a  parr  until  it  has  reached  the  smolt  stage. 
The  above  may  also  explain  why  a  greater  number  of  lines  occur 


FIG.  99. — 74-lb.  Small  Spring  Fish.     22nd  February  1911. 

between  the  winter  mark  of  the  parr  and  the  grilse  than  appear  in  after 
years,  (b]  The  lines  often  break  up  into  two  or  three  parts,  and  are 
very  difficult  to  follow.  I  always  procure  for  examination  scales 
having  the  greatest  number  of  small  lines  in  the  parr  stage,  and  as 
perfect  in  the  centre  as  it  is  possible  to  get  them.  When  I  have 
selected  a  perfect  specimen,  I  count  from  the  centre  to  the  right  in  an 
upward  direction,  but  not  quite  to  the  top,  because  small  lines  are 
always  forming  there,  which  would  confuse  one.  In  this  way,  if  one 
always  counts  in  the  same  direction,  one  will  find  all  the  grilse,  small 
spring  fish  and  large  spring  fish,  have  the  same  number  of  rings.  The 


IOO 


The   Salmon 


o 

6 


o 


.a 
o 


o 


The   Salmon 


101 


u 

_ 

rt 


SO 


o 

ON 


.o 

M 

O 

c 


IO2 


The  Salmon 


lines  from  the  kelt  to  their  return  in  the  clean  state  are  quite  easily 
counted,  and  give  one  a  more  correct  idea  of  the  number  of  lines  put 
on  in  the  sea  during  each  month  and  year. 

The  fish,  Fig.  104,  has  been  in  the  sea  one  year  and  four  months, 
having  put  on  twenty-three  lines  on  its  scale  since  going  down  as  a 
kelt.  There  are  also  eight  very  narrow  lines  where  one  would  expect 
to  find  broad  ones. 


FIG.  104. — 24  Ibs.      2Oth  June  1911. 

The  fish,  Fig.  105,  came  up  the  previous  year  as  an  early  grilse, 
spawned,  became  a  kelt,  and  went  down  to  the  sea  in  spring,  return- 
ing in  July  of  the  same  year.  There  are  eight  lines  from  the  kelt 
mark  to  the  outer  edge  of  the  scale,  showing  it  had  gone  dowrn  in 
February  and  remained  six  months  in  the  sea.  Many  kelts  which 
proceed  seawards  during  winter  and  spring  begin  to  return  early 
in  July,  and  increase  in  numbers  daily  until  the  advent  of  December, 


The   Salmon 


103 


FIG.  105. — 7  Ibs.     2Oth  July  1907. 


f 


FIG.  106. — 24  Ibs.     nth  April  1911. 


IO4 


The  Salmon 


o. 
J= 


o 

n 


cc 
o 


o 


The   Salmon 


105 


particularly    those    that    were     kelts    eighteen     months    previous    to 
July. 

A  far  greater  number  of  fish  return  after  spawning  than  is  gener- 
ally supposed ;  and  our  netting  operations  confirm  this  statement. 
When  the  netting  ceases  on  the  2Oth  of  August  we  invariably  come 
across  the  greatest  number,  and  if  the  nets  were  to  continue  for  lour 
weeks  longer  we  would  meet  with  a  much  greater  percentage. 


FIG.  109. — 35  Ibs.     2Oth  August  1910. 

Fig.  1 06  is  a  scale  showing  sixteen  rings  added  since  descending 
as  a  kelt  the  previous  spring. 

Fig.  107  is  a  scale  showing  fifteen  rings  added  since  descending 
as  a  kelt  the  previous  spring. 

The  fish,  Fig.  108,  has  added  sixteen  rings  to  its  scale  since  pro- 
ceeding to  the  sea  as  a  kelt  the  previous  spring,  and  remained  there 
throughout  one  year.  The  lines  round  the  kelt  mark  have  a  peculiarly 
twisted  appearance. 

The  fish,  Fig.  109,  has  added  twenty-seven  rings  to  its  scale 

14 


106  The   Salmon 

since  descending  the  previous  February,  having  spent  eighteen  months 
in  the  sea  before  again  returning  to  fresh  water.  Before  descending 
the  scale  shows  a  hundred  lines,  in  addition  to  forty-two  parr  lines, 
quite  the  greatest  number  on  any  scale  that  I  have  examined  from 
Tay  salmon.  I  make  this  fish  to  have  descended  when  three  years 
old. 

SALMON  SCALES  FROM  NORWEGIAN   FISH 

It  might  be  of  interest  to  compare  a  few  scales  from  fish  of 
Norwegian  rivers  with  those  taken  from  our  Tay  fish.  Col.  Percy 
Hargreaves  very  kindly  sent  me  some  scales  to  examine  (withholding 
name  of  river,  date,  and  weight)  from  fish  caught  by  him  during 
season  1910.  On  examination  I  had  little  difficulty  in  detecting  the 
time  each  had  entered  the  river,  its  age,  weight,  and  average  weight 
of  the  whole,  which  I  put  down  at  27  Ibs.  This  proved  to  be  within 
3  oz.  of  the  actual  weight.  Col.  Percy  Hargreaves'  description  of 
the  river  is  as  follows  :- -The  Aaro  in  the  Sognfield,  near  Sogndal, 
about  seventy  miles  N.E.  of  Bergen,  rises  in  a  lake  called  the  Hafsh 
Lake,  and  is  about  seven  miles  long.  Salmon  can  only  ascend  for  one 
mile,  the  other  six  miles  being  a  series  of  waterfalls.  The  river  for 
about  six  miles  is  nearly  fifty  yards  wide,  and  is  more  like  a  mill-race 
than  anything  else.  The  lake  is  fed  from  a  very  large  glacier,  and 
from  December  to  April  the  fishable  part  of  the  river  is  almost  dry. 
As  far  as  I  can  gather,  nearly  all  the  fish  and  burn-trout  leave  the 
river  by  December  ;  a  few  may  remain,  but  very  few. 

From  a  close  examination  of  these  Norwegian  scales  I  have 
come  to  the  conclusion  that  nearly  all  the  parr  become  smolts  when 
under  two  years  of  age.  Most  of  the  scales  have  on  an  average 
twenty-five  lines  on  them  before  any  change  takes  place,  and  on  the 
larger  fish  this  is  clearly  seen.  On  the  other  hand,  all  the  smolt 
scales  I  have  examined  show  more  lines  than  are  to  be  seen  on  those 
of  the  large  fish.  If  I  were  to  judge  from  the  scales  of  the  large  fish 
when  the  smolts  went  down,  I  would  say  at  twenty-one  months,  but 
judging  from  the  smolt  scales,  I  should  say  twenty-six  months.  No 


The   Salmon 


107 


doubt,  the  difference  is  due  to  the  interval  that  occurs  between  the 
parr  stage  and  the  time  the  smolt  goes  to  the  sea.  I  have  found  the 
same  difference  to  exist  in  the  parr  and  smolts  of  the  Tay.  In  my 
opinion,  the  large  fish  of  the  Aaro  are  of  the  same  age  as  our  spring 
fish  in  the  Tay,  which  average  22  Ibs.,  the  difference  being  due  to  the 
fish  of  the  former  having  four  months'  longer  feeding  in  the  sea.  Out 


V 1      s  J"f 


•-\  - 


FIG.  110. — 22-lb.  Female.     Norway,  gth  June  1910. 

of  forty-eight  scales  examined,  I  found  thirty-eight  to  have  an  average 
of  eighty-four  lines  on  them,  the  remaining  ten  having  over  one 
hundred  lines,  showing  they  had  been  up  on  a  previous  occasion. 
Apparently  no  run  of  small  spring  fish  takes  place  in  this  river.  The 
larger  fish  make  their  appearance  towards  the  end  of  May,  followed 
by  a  run  of  smaller  fish,  averaging  about  16  Ibs.,  early  in  July,  and  in 
August  by  a  few  grilse  and  sea-trout. 

The  scale  taken  from  the  fish,  Fig.  no,  has  eighty-four  lines  on 


loS 


The  Salmon 


>>. 


'    •   •    -X 

i-  '  /   :. 

&v'-'    '  ." 

>-;•;: 


The   Salmon 


109 


it,  making  its  age  to  be  five  years  three  months.  Thirty  narrow  lines 
point  to  its  having  gone  down  when  two  years  old. 

The  scale,  Fig.  in,  shows  one  hundred  lines,  and  the  fish  went 
down  as  a  kelt  the  previous  year,  when  it  put  on  sixteen  lines.  Thirty 
narrow  lines  in  the  centre  show  it  had  gone  down  also  when  two  years 
old. 

The  scale,   Fig.  112,  shows  eighty-five  lines,  making  the   fish   to 


FIG.  113. — ag-lb.  Female.     28th  June  1910. 

be  five  years  three  months.  It  is  impossible  from  this  scale  to  tell 
where  the  parr  lines  end,  as  they  are  not  well  defined. 

The  scale,  Fig.  113,  shows  eighty-seven  lines,  making  the  fish  to 
be  of  same  age  as  Fig.  112.  The  parr  lines  in  this  scale  are  well 
defined,  showing  clearly  each  year's  growth  of  sixteen  lines.  This 
fish  went  down  when  two  years  old. 

The  scale,  Fig.  114,  shows  thirty  parr  lines,  showing  it  had  gone 
down  when  two  years  old.  At  four  years  and  three  months  it  came 
up  again,  the  rings  having  increased  to  sixty-eight.  The  fish  then 


I  10 


The   Salmon 


FIG.  114. — 36-lb.  Male.     29th  June  1910. 


FIG.   115.  —  24-lb.  Male.      3Oth  June  1910. 


The   Salmon  m 

became   a  kelt,  descended,   and  came   up   the   following  year,   adding 
sixteen  additional  rings,  making  it  six  years  three  months. 

Fig.  115  is  a  scale  showing  one  hundred  and  two  rings.  There 
are  two  well-defined  contractions,  each  of  which  has  sixteen  lines, 
showing  it  had  also  gone  down  when  two  years  old,  making  it  in  all 
one  month  older  than  Fig.  1 14. 


FIG.  116. — 35-lb.  Female.     6th  July  1910. 

I  can  only  make  out  eighty-four  lines  in  the  scale,  Fig.  116,  as 
the  centre  part  is  incomplete.  This  fish  is  on  its  third  return,  having 
been  up  on  two  previous  occasions.  There  are  sixteen  lines  between 
the  last  two  contractions. 

The  scale,  Fig.  117,  shows  eighty-five  lines,  making  it  out  to  be 
five  years  four  months.  It  shows  twenty-three  parr  lines,  but  it  is 
impossible  to  know  when  it  went  down — probably  when  two  years  old. 


1  12 


The  Salmon 


FIG.  117. — 25-lb.  Female,     nth  July  1910. 


FIG.  nS. — 22-lb.  Male,     gth  June  1910. 


The   Salmon  n3 

The  scale,  Fig.  118,  shows  thirty-two  parr  lines,  sixteen  between 
each  contraction.  It  is  quite  an  interesting  scale,  as  at  the  second 
contraction  one  can  discern  a  distinct  line  encircling  the  scale,  such  as 
is  made  when  a  fish  is  on  its  second  return  from  the  sea.  This  ring 
might  be  caused  after  spawning,  when  in  the  kelt  stage,  by  the  scale 
becoming  reduced.  We  know  quite  well  male  parr  spawn  and  become 
kelts,  but  we  do  not  know  if  the  same  thing  happens  with  the  kelt- 
parr  as  happens  with  the  salmon  on  its  second  return.  With  the 


FIG.  119.  —  i4-lb.  Male  (Namsen).     7th  June  1911. 

former,  however,  the  ring  is  put  on  in  fresh  water,  and  in  the  case  of 
the  latter  this  occurs  in  the  sea.  Many  male  parr  during  the  second 
season  have  a  more  pronounced  and  better-defined  ring  on  their 
scales  than  is  to  be  seen  in  that  of  the  opposite  sex.  When  we  state 
a  fish  has  only  spawned  once,  we  may  not  be  quite  correct  in  our 
assumption,  for  in  the  parr  stage  spawning  may  have  occurred  two  or 
three  times.  In  the  case  of  the  opposite  sex,  however,  we  are  more 
sure  of  our  ground,  as  we  never  find  female  parr  carrying  spawn. 

15 


1 14  The   Salmon 

During  1911  I  examined  several  parr  sent  me  by  Col.  Percy  Har- 
greaves  from  the  Aaro,  and  I  found  the  following  number  of  lines  on 
their  scales  :  5f-inch  parr  with  fifteen  lines  ;  6f-inch  with  twenty-six 
lines  ;  and  8-inch  with  thirty  lines. 


- 


FIG.  120. — 35-lb.  Female  (Namsen).     I2th  May  1911. 


NORWEGIAN  SCALES  ( RIVER  NAMSEN) 

I  am  indebted  to  Henry  J.  Pearson,  Esq.,  Bramcote,  Notts.,  for 
scales  taken  from  River  Namsen  fish. 

The  scale,  Fig.  119,  has  in  all  seventy-five  rings,  twenty-three 
of  which  are  narrow  ones,  showing  the  fish  had  gone  down  when  two 
years  old,  or  perhaps  a  month  or  so  earlier.  It  came  up  as  a  grilse, 


The  Salmon  n5 

went   down   again   to  the   sea,   and   returned   the   following  year,   and 
during  that  time  added  nineteen  rings. 

The  scale,  Fig.  120,  has  twenty-five  narrow  lines,  which  also 
shows  it  had  gone  down  when  two  years  old.  When  six  and  a  half 
years  of  age  it  returned  again,  having  at  that  time  one  hundred  and 
five  rings.  Going  down  again  to  the  sea,  it  returned  the  following 
year  with  seventeen  rings  added  to  the  scale. 


FIG.  121. — 27-lb.  Male  (Namsen).      I2thjune  1911. 

The  scale,  Fig.  121,  has  twenty-seven  small  rings,  showing 
it  had,  like  the  preceding  two,  gone  down  when  two  years  old. 
During  its  stay  in  the  sea  other  sixty-three  lines  were  added 
before  again  coming  into  fresh  water.  Once  more  descending,  it 
came  back  the  following  year  showing  twenty  additional  lines  on 

its  scale. 

The  scale,  Fig.  122,  shows  one  hundred  and  twenty  lines,  of 
which  twenty-five  are  parr  lines.  During  its  first  sojourn  in  the  sea 


n6 


The   Salmon 


- 
<u 


vO 


t-:  •:.::,.* 


7rf 


<U 
C 


ca 


_J 
"rt 

s 


00 


The   Salmon  n7 

seventy-six  lines  were  added,  and  on  its  second  visit  twenty-one  lines, 
making  the  fish  to  be  SJ  years  of  age. 

The  scale,  Fig.  123,  has  one  hundred  rings,  twenty-five  of  which 

are  parr  lines.  This  fish  is  on  its  first  return  from  the  sea,  and  is  6J 
years  of  age. 

I    examined   other    six   scales,    and    found   all   to   have   the  same 


-  ^  * 


FIG.  124. — 62-lh.   King  Salmon. 

number  ol  lines,  namely,  one  hundred  and  thirty-seven.  Strange  to 
say,  out  of  ten  scales,  I  found  four  of  them  to  have  been  up  before, 
and  this  in  a  river  where  anglers  seldom  meet  with  kelts.  From  this 
it  is  clear  more  kelts  must  go  down  and  return  than  is  generally 
believed  to  be  the  case.  In  order  to  arrive  at  a  correct  idea  how 
many  return,  the  river  would  require  to  be  netted  each  month  from 
May  to  October,  so  that  a  much  larger  number  could  be  examined. 

John    Roberts,    Esq.,   very   kindly   sent   me   several  scales   taken 


nS 


The   Salmon 


from  fish  caught  in  the  Fusta  River,  Norway.  The  scale  from  a 
35-lb.  fish  had  one  hundred  and  one  lines,  twenty-seven  of  which  were 
parr  lines.  I  make  this  fish  out  to  be  6^  years  old.  Another  scale 
from  a  grilse  showed  fifty-three  lines,  and  was  quite  like  one  of  our 
own  from  a  Tay  fish.  Mr.  Roberts  was  also  kind  enough  to  get  his 
ghillie  to  send  me  a  few  parr  from  that  river.  Those  I  examined  had 
all  nineteen  lines  on  their  scales,  and  were  caught  in  August.  No 


FIG.  125. — 35-lb.  Tyee  Salmon  (Campbell  River).     2Oth  August  1910. 

doubt,   if  caught  in   May  of  the   following  year,  the   usual  number  of 
lines  would  be  found. 


SCALES  FROM   KING  OR  TYEE  SALMON,  CAMPBELL  RIVER,  VANCOUVER 

The  illustration  shown  (Fig.  124)  is  from  a  scale  kindly  sent  me 
by  R.  P.  Page,  Esq.  This  scale  has  one  hundred  and  twenty-eight 
lines,  and  estimating  its  age  as  we  do  the  salmon,  I  would  say  it  was 


The  Salmon 


119 


8  years  old.  The  lines  on  this  scale  are  very  well  defined,  and  show 
no  parr  mark  or  contraction. 

I  received  the  scale,  Fig.  125,  from  Captain  B.  Starkey.  There 
are  eighty-eight  lines  on  this  scale,  which  compares  favourably  with 
those  of  Tay  salmon  of  the  same  weight,  whose  age  would  be  5^  years. 

Like  the  former  salmon  scales  I  found  no  parr  marks  or  contrac- 
tions. Fig.  126  has  seventy-eight  rings,  and  another  I  examined 


FlG.  126. — 14-lb.  Choe  Salmon  (Vancouver).     4th  September  1910. 

from   a  fish   of  8    Ibs.   had   seventy  rings.      The    former,   I    presume 
would  be  4^  years  and  the  latter  5  years  of  age. 


LARGE  SALMON 

The  largest  salmon  caught  in  British  waters  during  the  last  thirty- 
six  years  was  caught  in  the  nets  on  the  Tay  at  Newburgh  in  1872. 
Its  length  was  4  feet  5  inches,  its  girth  2  feet  7  inches,  and  its  weight 
71  Ibs.  Mr.  Frank  Buckland  had  a  cast  made  of  this  fish  and  painted  by 
Rolfe.  It  is  now  in  the  Buckland  Museum,  South  Kensington,  labelled 
70  Ibs.,  having  evidently  lost  i  Ib.  by  the  time  it  reached  London,  as 


I2O 


The   Salmon 


I  distinctly  remember  seeing  it  in  Mr.  Speedie's  window  in  Perth, 
labelled  71  Ibs.  I  was  fortunate  in  procuring  the  negative  of  this  fish, 
and  have  pleasure  in  reproducing  it  (Fig.  127).  Fish  between  50  and 
60  Ibs.  in  weight  are  often  caught  in  the  nets  on  the  Tay,  while  a  few 
between  60  and  65  Ibs.  are  sometimes  captured  ;  but  beyond  this  weight 
fish  are  rare.  I  have  noticed  in  our  fish-house  as  many  as  forty  fish  over 
40  Ibs.  in  weight,  all  caught  in  one  day  with  the  nets.  In  smaller  rivers, 
however,  a  4O-lb.  fish  is  considered  a  monster.  The  following  are 
the  weights  of  a  few  of  the  largest  fish  caught  with  the  rod  on 
the  Tay  :- 


Date. 

Weight. 

March 

1870 

6l 

Ibs. 

July 

1875 

5i| 

5? 

Oct. 

1883 

54 

„ 

55 

,, 

Oct. 

1898 

56 

55 

53 

55 

Oct. 

1903 

55* 

55 

,, 

1903 

47 

5) 

Oct.       1907     63 


Name  of  Angler. 

John  Haggart 

J.  Gellatly 

Lord  Ruthven 

The  Marquis  of  Zetland 

Captain  Goodwin 

Lord  Blythswood 
P.  M.  Coats 
W.  H.  Coats 
Mr.    Fletcher    (Man- 
chester) 
Mr.  Stewart  (Perth) 


Where  Caught. 

Stanley 

Ballathie 

Taymount 

Stanley- 
Scone  Palace 
water 

Stobhall 

Stobhall 

Stobhall 

Below  Perth- 
free  water 

Below  Perth- 
free  water 


How  Caught. 

Minnow 
Sea-trout  fly 
Fly,  Jock  Scott 
Fly,  Major 
Prawn 

Fly 

Fly,  Wilkinson 

Fly 

Minnow 

Worm 


The   Salmon 


121 


e/i 


OJ 

hJ 


O 
t^ 

CO 


a 
H 


to 


rt 

u 


c 

O 


16 


122 


The   Salmon 


a 


a 
H 


CO 


gjf 

""     rt 


C/3 


The   Salmon 


123 


r: 
U 


O 


o 

c 
3 


H 


o 

13 
en 


rt 

s 


o 


124 


The   Salmon 


a 
H 


rt 
V 


bfl 


c 
o 


cn 

— 
3 


<u 


"o 

O 


O 
O 


c 
'2 

C3 

U 
c 

rt 


S 

~tti 


o 


The   Salmon 


125 


O 
"rt 


CS 

- 


J1J 

"rt 


126 


The  Salmon 


_O 
O 

O 


O 
O 


-c 
o 

,-) 

OJ 

rt 


,a 

03 


Ofl 

rt 
o 

c" 

O 


JU 
*e3 


The   Salmon 


127 


Fig.  134  shows  the  head  of  the  63-lb.  fish  caught  in  October  1907 
(see  p.  120).  It  weighed  23  Ibs.,  and  the  length  from  snout  to  gill- 
cover  measured  15  inches.  The  average  weight  of  the  heaviest  salmon 
taken  with  the  nets  each  year  on  the  Tay  for  fourteen  years  is  60  Ibs. 
2  oz.  The  largest  fish  taken  in  the  nets  this  year  (1908)  was  63 J  Ibs. 


FIG.  134. — Head  of  a  63-lb.  Male  Salmon,  caught  by  the  rod  on  the  Tay,  October  1907 


SALMON  BRED  IN  PONDS  AND  CONFINED  IN  LOCHS 

Parr  hand-fed  in  ponds  differ  widely  from  those  bred  in  their 
natural  state.  If  they  are  specially  well  fed,  many  of  them  will  become 
smolts  at  the  age  of  one  year.  When  this  happens  the  smolt  goes 
on  feeding  and  growing  far  more  quickly  than  his  neighbours  in  the 
same  pond  that  are  still  parr,  and  will  not  cease  feeding  during 
the  winter  if  food  is  abundant.  When  the  Stormontfield  Ponds 
were  emptied  on  23rd  March  1908,  it  was  found  that  something  had 


128 


The  Salmon 


V 

c 


c 
£ 

"rt 
iT. 

JU 

"n 


rt 

H 

.£ 

CO 


The   Salmon 


29 


u 


Ct 

U 


rt 

u 


C/3 

v 

3 


LI") 

O 


0. 
1) 

cn 


to 

c 


The   Salmon 


happened  to  the  fry,  with   the  result  that  the  numbers  of  smolts  and 
parr    were    greatly    reduced.       Those    remaining    had    more    feeding 

than  usual,  consequently  a 
greater  proportion  became 
smolts  the  first  year,  many 
of  them  being  eight  times 
the  weight  of  those  that  re- 
mained parr.  Fig.  139  shows 
two  of  the  same  age — the  one 
8  oz.,  and  the  other  i  oz.  The 
larger  one  became  a  smolt  when 
one  year  old,  and  the  smaller 
was  just  assuming  the  smolt 
stage  when  two  years  old.  The 
larger  one,  too,  had  a  greater 
number  of  rings  on  its  scales 
than  the  other.  If  these  smolts 
are  prevented  from  going  to 
the  sea,  they  develop  ova  and 
may  spawn  on  more  than  one 
occasion,  but  their  growth  is 
greatly  retarded.  A  smolt 
thus  imprisoned  usually  weighs 
at  the  end  of  the  first  year 
from  6  to  10  oz.  ;  at  the  end 
of  the  second,  from  10  to  iS 
oz.  ;  and  at  the  end  of  the 
third  year,  from  18  to  32  oz. 
A  smolt  four  years  old  can  thus 
be  2  Ibs.  in  weight  if  it  has 
remained  all  its  time  in  fresh 
water.  (See  illustrations  of  smolts  at  different  ages  and  of  different 
weights.)  Smolts  so  confined  become  very  restless,  moving  rapidly 
through  the  water  and  leaping  high  into  the  air.  Several  I  had  con- 


ri 
,c 


c 

'-C 


O 
X 


• 


The   Salmon 


fined  in  tanks  succeeded  in  jumping  out,  whilst  others  merely  swam 
round  and  round  as  if  seeking  for  an  exit.  Should  such  be  made  in  a 
pond,  or  even  in  a  large  loch, 
smolts  would  quickly  find  it  out 
and  make  their  way  seawards. 

After  a  parr  becomes  a  smolt 
it  never  loses  its  silvery  scales 
again.  All  those  I  have  ever 
caught  were  like  a  bar  of  silver 
both  in  summer  and  in  winter. 
During  April  and  May  they  rise 
freely  to  fly,  but  after  this  they 
begin  to  become  bottom-feeders. 
When  hooked  with  fly  they 
give  good  sport,  cutting  through 
the  water  like  a  knife,  and 
then  jumping  several  times  out 
of  it. 


SALMON  FEEDING  IN  FRESH 
WATER 

A  great  deal  of  nonsense 
has  been  talked  about  salmon 
feeding  in  fresh  water.  I  have 
had  ample  opportunity  of  watch- 
ing salmon  all  my  life,  from 
the  time  they  enter  fresh  water 
till  their  return  to  the  sea, 
and  I  have  given  close  atten- 
tion to  the  subject,  and  have 
no  hesitation  in  stating  that 
during  the  salmon's  sojourn  in  fresh  water  it  does  not  require  to  feed. 
It  does  seem  strange,  of  course,  that  a  fish  coming  up  a  river  in 


'32 


The   Salmon 


o 

5 


t/3 

C 

£ 
o 

o 


u 

d^ 
a 


c 
o 

'-1  2 
o 

13    S2 

1C     rt 

^    <u 

I 

o   — 


-c 

0) 


o 
u 


N 

C 


o    o 


3     rt 

2  s 


E? 

a 


o 

CO 


The   Salmon 


o 

^ 
a 
tfl 


o 
u 

V 


OJ 

c 
c 

T3 

OJ 

c 
<c 

o 


o 
g 

C/3 


134 


The   Salmon 


rt 
tfl 


rt 
01 


1) 

<u 


u 
o 


eg 

^ 

<u 


T3 
OJ 

c 


o 

X 

N 

o 

00 


The   Salmon 


155 


•«?    £• 


O 

c/i 
rt 
bfl 


O 
o 

0) 


V 

"15 


o 


cj 

O 


0) 

05 


c 
o 
o 


o 


136 


The   Salmon 


October    in    prime   condition,   remains    there    for    seventeen    months, 
and  returns   to  the  sea  without  having   tasted  food  ;  nevertheless,   it 


t/1 


t/5 

c 


•£    o 
i    o 

-       OJ 


S.    to 


"  (]J 


00 


o 

u 


o 

C/7 


N) 
C 


is  true.      Many  people  do  not  believe  this,  and  no  doubt  there  will 
be  a  considerable  number  of  that   opinion  for   many  years  to   come. 


The   Salmon 


137 


When  fish  enter  fresh  water  they  begin  to  decrease  in  weight,  and 
altogether  fall  off  in  condition  until  they  return  to  the  sea  again. 


rt 

to 


o 
<J 


OJ 

rt 


-3 
tU 

c. 
<^ 
s 
c 
<J 


C 
5 


•* 

CJ 


Others  again  endeavour  to  prove  that  they  do  feed  in  fresh  water 

by  referring  to  the  well-mended  kelt ;  but,  although  the  kelt  appears  as 

18 


i7g  The   Salmon 

\j 

if  it  had  been  feeding  and  growing  fatter,  it  is  still  losing  weight.  It 
is  not,  therefore,  the  fish  that  is  growing  fatter  ;  it  is  the  eye  that 
is  deceived  by  the  scales  becoming  more  silvery  and  the  fish  more 
showy.  The  kelt,  of  course,  does  become  much  stronger  in  April, 
and  is  then  more  difficult  to  land  ;  but  the  same  thing  holds  good 
with  regard  to  spring  fish,  for  in  the  cold  weather  in  January  and 
February  they  are  not  nearly  so  strong  as  they  would  be  if  caught 
in  April  or  May.  It  is  the  higher  temperature  of  the  water  that 
is  the  cause  of  this :  it  is  not  that  the  fish  has  become  stronger 
through  feeding.  No  doubt  a  fish  immediately  after  its  exertions 
in  spawning  is  weaker  than  it  would  be,  say,  two  months  later, 
but  its  strength  is  due  to  good  health  and  not  to  feeding.  In  all 
my  experience  I  have  never  observed  a  kelt  chase  a  parr,  smolt, 
or  trout,  nor  have  I  ever  known  of  any  one  having  seen  such  a 
thing,  although  I  quite  recently  read  an  article  in  which  the  writer 
mentions  that  kelts  make  great  havoc  amongst  smolts  !  If  salmon 
do  feed  in  fresh  water  there  would  be  nothing  but  parr,  smolts, 
and  trout  for  them  to  feed  upon.  If  such  were  their  food,  then  the 
hundreds  of  thousands  of  salmon  in  some  of  our  rivers  would 
swallow  them  all  up  in  a  week.  They  will  take  a  cherry,  a  goose- 
berry, an  acorn,  a  leaf,  or  almost  anything  that  swims  against  the 
current.  On  taking  any  of  these,  however,  the  fish  eject  them  even 
although  they  have  been  swallowed,  and  allow  them  to  fall  to  the 
bottom  without  exciting  any  further  curiosity. 

I  have  on  several  occasions  dropped  prawn  from  a  bridge  into  a 
river.  They  were  readily  taken,  but  after  a  few  nibbles  the  fish 
allowed  them  to  fall  to  the  bottom.  I  have  dropped  sweets  in  the 
same  way,  and  the  fish  took  them,  but  treated  them  as  they  did  the 
prawn.  A  few  years  ago,  for  the  sake  of  experiment,  I  obtained 
leave  to  kill  as  many  kelts  as  I  wished  during  the  last  week  of 
April,  at  which  period  the  river  is  full  of  smolts.  I  killed  many  of 
them,  but  failed  to  find  any  food  in  their  stomachs.  At  the  same 
time  I  killed  many  sea-trout  kelts,  weighing,  in  some  cases,  3  and 
4  Ibs.  In  most  of  these,  however,  I  found  flies  and  the  larvae 


The   Salmon  139 

of  the  early  Ephemerae  and  caddis- flies  in  process  of  digestion. 
I  have  examined  thousands  of  salmon  in  our  fish-house,  but  have 
never  found  any  trace  of  food  in  any  of  them  ;  neither  have  our  men, 
who  have  had  hundreds  of  thousands  through  their  hands.  As  I  have 
already  said,  it  is  not  so  with  sea-trout  and  brown  trout.  They  are 
often  found  gorged  with  parr  and  smolts.  In  the  stomachs  of  sea-trout 
caught  in  tidal  waters  are  often  found  sand-eels,  sparling,  and  young 
herring. 

"  WHY  DO  FISH  COME  UP  FROM  THE  SEA?' 

The  majority  of  anglers  and  those  interested   in  the   life-history 
of  the  salmon  would  undoubtedly  answer  "  To  spawn." 

This  may  be  one  reason,  but  I  am  not  convinced  that  it  is  the 
true  solution.  If  we  but  consider,  a  spring  fish  coming  up  in  October, 
with  no  signs  of  spawn  developing,  and  remaining  in  fresh  water  for 
more  than  a  year  before  spawning,  it  is  difficult  to  believe  "  the 
spawning  instinct  "  has  caused  it  to  leave  the  sea.  My  own  idea  is 
(and  I  am  pleased  to  note  Sir  Herbert  Maxwell  holds  the  same  views) 
the  fish  feed  in  the  sea  so  long  as  they  are  able,  and  then  when  the 
migratory  instinct  comes  on  they  make  for  their  own  particular  river. 
They  may  remain  for  a  longer  or  a  shorter  period  in  the  river,  but 
the  desire  to  feed  does  not  again  return  until  they  have  spawned  and 
become  kelts.  Even  in  the  kelt  stage  no  undue  haste  is  apparent  of 
their  desire  to  return  to  the  sea  to  feed.  I  do  not  for  one 'moment 
believe  that  fish  coming  up  a  river  return  again  to  the  sea  to  feed 
before  finally  entering  the  fresh  water  to  spawn.  We  occasionally 
meet  with  fish  in  the  Tay  estuary,  mostly  red  fish  which  have  come 
up  in  the  spring,  but  these  are  so  few  in  number  we  could  scarcely 
•call  it  a  migration.  Another  point  requiring  to  be  cleared  up  is— 
Why  do  some  fish  re-enter  a  river  alter  one  year's  sojourn  in  the  sea, 
whilst  others  are  two,  three,  and  four  years  before  returning? 

It  is  also  difficult  to  find  a  satisfactory  reason  why  some  kelts, 
.after  a  four  months'  sojourn  in  the  sea,  return  to  the  river,  whilst 
others  remain  from  one  to  three  years.  Parr,  as  we  know,  go  from 


140 


The   Salmon 


feeding  during  the  winter,  and  nature  may  work  in  the  same  mysterious 
way  with  the  salmon  during  each  succeeding  winter  in  the  sea. 

This  periodic  temporary  fast,  as  we  might  term  it,  may  account 
for  the  closer  dark  lines  that  appear  on  the  scales.  I  do  not,  however, 
think  this  could  be  caused  by  the  fish  ceasing  to  feed,  as  they  cease 
doing  so  at  all  seasons  when  their  time  comes  to  enter  fresh  water. 
We  see  this  in  trout,  but  not  quite  so  pronounced.  In  Loch  Leven 
during  the  summer  and  winter  about  six  per  cent  ol  the  trout  are 
barren,  and  would  not  spawn  the  same  year.  These  trout  keep  in 
perfect  condition  during  the  winter  and  summer,  and  do  not  seek  up 
the  various  spawning  streams.  Fish  may,  therefore,  come  up  from  the 
sea  for  two  reasons:  (i)  Feeding  has  ceased;  (2)  Forced  to  do  so 
because  spawning  season  has  arrived.  We  know  from  the  marks  on 
the  scales  that  many  of  the  autumn  fish  full  of  spawn  feed  up  till  the 
time  they  leave  the  sea.  This  may  have  something  to  do  with  the 
kelts  from  these  fish  returning  quickly  to  the  sea  after  spawning.  All 
autumn  fish,  however,  do  not  behave  in  this  manner,  as  many  remain 
for  a  much  longer  period  after  spawning. 

MOVEMENTS  OF  SALMON  IN  TIDAL  RIVERS 

My  experience  of  the  movements  of  salmon  in  tidal  waters  is 
almost  entirely  confined  to  the  Tay.  The  Tay  has  a  long  estuary, 
and  the  tide  flows  for  a  distance  of  35  miles.  The  lower  part  of  the 
river  is  from  2  to  3  miles  broad  during  high  water,  and  the 
upper  part  from  100  to  400  yards  wide.  During  winter  and  spring 
many  fish  remain  a  considerable  time  in  the  estuary  on  coming 
from  the  sea.  It  is  rather  strange  that  an  east  wind  brings  the 
fish  in  towards  the  shore,  whilst  a  west  wind  makes  them  hasten 
up  the  river.  Mild  weather,  too,  makes  them  push  up  the  river, 
while  snow  floods  keep  them  back.  When  the  snow  water  begins  to 
leave  the  river  they  come  on  in  large  numbers,  and  during  some 
seasons  it  is  only  when  the  floods  cease  that  the  fish  begin  to  run, 
although,  when  the  floods  are  caused  by  rain,  fish  will  run  in  high 


The   Salmon 


141 


water.  As  the  season  advances  the  fish  are  more  inclined  to  come 
on,  and  the  greater  number  of  them  come  up  the  estuary  with  the 
tide.  At  high  tide,  however,  many  fish  turn  and  go  down  the  river 
on  days  most  suitable  for  their  travelling  upstream. 

Taking  the  season  as  a  whole,  more  fish  are  caught  with  the  nets 
on  their  way  down  the  river  than  there  are  on  their  way  up.  From 
May  until  the  end  of  July  fish  coming  up  with  the  tide  are  far  more 
eager  to  push  forward  than  those  ascending  at  any  other  part  of  the 
season,  very  few  remaining  in  tidal  water  during  summer.  In  the 
early  autumn,  however,  large  numbers  of  fish  coming  up  with  the  tide, 
return  to  the  estuary  again,  and  remain  there  until  the  temperature  of 
the  weather  or  the  water  induces  them  to  push  forward.  Both  high 
winds  and  floods  induce  fish  to  move  upstream.  During  August  and 
September  floods  need  not  be  higher  than  from  four  to  six  feet  to 
bring  them  off  the  banks  below.  While  they  remain  in  the  lower  parts 
of  the  river  they  lose  their  silvery  appearance,  become  red  in  colour,  and 
show  signs  of  the  spawning  season  coming  on  them.  Often  when  fish 
are  running  well  in  a  moderate -sized  flood,  and  the  river  continues  to 
rise,  they  will  cease  running  for  the  time  being,  or,  in  the  words  of  the 
fishermen,  the  high  water  "  puts  them  back."  The  largest  number  run 
when  the  river  clears  up,  one  day  or,  it  may  be,  two  days  after  the  flood. 

Throughout  spring  most  of  our  fish  are  caught  on  the  sunny  side 
of  the  river,  showing  that  they  keep  to  this  side.  In  the  autumn, 
again,  they  are  got  on  both  sides.  I  am  inclined  to  think  that  fish 
coming  in  from  the  sea,  run  up  with  the  tide  and  fall  back  again  as  it 
ebbs,  and  do  not  proceed  up  the  river  again  until  wind  and  water  are 
favourable  for  their  pushing  right  forward.  If  this  were  not  so,  I  am 
afraid  they  would  have  little  chance  of  escaping  the  nets,  for  on  four 
occasions  during  twenty-four  hours  and  twenty-four  times  a  week  they 
would  run  the  risk  of  being  caught.  As  a  rule,  when  fish  are  collecting 
in  the  estuary,  it  is  chiefly  the  ones  that  have  just  come  from  the  sea 
that  are  caught  by  the  nets,  and  very  few  red  ones.  The  latter,  how- 
ever, are  captured  when  a  flood  comes  and  they  begin  to  leave  the 
banks.  When  everything  is  favourable  for  fish  running,  the  best 


142 


The   Salmon 


conditioned  ones  are  to  be  met  with.  On  days  that  are  unsuitable  for 
running,  many  of  the  fish  are  thin,  and  a  greater  number  in  proportion 
are  seal- marked,  showing  that  fish  in  prime  condition  are  more 
inclined  to  run  when  the  water  and  weather  are  suitable.  More 
fish  run  during  night  than  during  the  day. 

THE  MOVEMENTS  OF  THE  FISH  IN  THE  SEA 

We  have  little  knowledge  of  their  movements  from  the  time 
they  visit  the  sea  as  smolts  until  they  appear  again  along  the  coast, 
and  are  either  caught  in  the  stake-nets  or  soon  after  they  enter  a 
river.  I  am  of  opinion  that  every  salmon  or  grilse  on  coming  to  our 
shores  wishes  to  enter  its  own  river,  and  would  do  so  if  it  were  not 
caught  in  these  nets.  A  good  deal  of  nonsensical  talk  has  been 
indulged  in,  in  arguing  the  advisability  of  catching  all  the  fish  in  the 
sea  and  leaving  the  rivers  unfished.  The  wiser  plan,  however,  would  be 
to  remove  all  stake  and  bag  nets  from  the  sea  and  catch  the  fish  in  the 
rivers.  They  can  be  caught  in  the  rivers  at  far  less  expense,  and  being 
caught  by  sweep-nets,  are  not  so  roughly  handled,  and  are  killed  at  once 
on  being  captured.  They  are  thus  in  much  better  condition  than  those 
caught  in  stake-nets,  although  I  know  many  people  think  differently. 

During  the  sitting  of  the  recent  Royal  Commission,  Lord  Elgin 
was  astonished  to  hear  me  say  that  the  fish  caught  in  our  sweep- 
nets  were  better  than  those  caught  in  our  stake- nets  in  the  sea. 
My  explanation  was,  the  method  of  catching  them  made  the  river 
ones  superior  to  those  caught  in  the  sea.  If  they  toss  about  in  the 
stake-net  until  they  die  and  are  then  rolled  about  by  the  waves, 
their  scales  are  torn  and  rubbed  off  and  their  flesh  becomes  soft 
and  flabby,  and  altogether  they  have  the  appearance  of  "  cadged ' 
fish.  One  can  easily  see  this  if  the  two  kinds  be  compared  on 
a  fishmonger's  slab.  The  sea-caught  ones  lie  as  flat  as  a  flounder ; 
whereas  the  river-caught  ones  are  stiff  and  rigid  and  do  not  lie  flat. 

I  am  of  opinion  that  the  increased  number  of  stake  and  bag  nets 
on  the  coast   is   not  only  curtailing  the  supply  of  fish,  but  is  actually 


The   Salmon  143 

ruining  some  of  our  West  Coast  rivers  which  used  to  swarm  with 
salmon,  but  whose  yield  at  the  present  time  is  almost  nil.  The  fish 
run  up  these  small  rivers  from  the  sea  in  time  of  flood  ;  but  when  the 
flood  subsides  there  is  not  enough  water  to  protect  them,  conse- 
quently they  are  forced  to  return  to  the  sea  again,  and  are  captured 
by  the  stake-nets,  so  that  few  are  left  to  ascend  the  river  and  main- 
tain a  sufficient  stock.  Wherever,  too,  stake  or  bag  nets  have  been 
removed  the  stock  of  fish  has  increased.  At  present  these  nets  are 
allowed  to  be  used  far  too  near  the  mouths  of  rivers.  In  my  opinion 
they  ought  to  be  at  least  two  miles  away. 

Some  people  maintain  that  they  catch  many  fish  that  would  not 
enter  a  river  the  same  season,  but  most  of  the  fish  that  come  to  our 
coasts  are  steering  their  course  to  some  river.  I  do  not  think  more 
than  three  per  cent  of  the  salmon  thus  caught  would  remain  in  the 
sea.  Even  if  many  of  them  did  remain,  it  is  no  argument  in  favour  of 
catching  them  in  the  sea,  because  the  nets  would  be  taking  immature 
fish,  which  by  another  year  might  be  three  times  the  weight.  Again, 
during  their  sojourn  in  the  sea  their  food  costs  nothing.  I  think,  then, 
the  number  of  stake-nets  in  the  sea  should  be  greatly  lessened. 
Riparian  proprietors  spend  a  great  deal  of  money  in  providing  for  the 
welfare  of  the  salmon  in  their  rivers.  Yet  we  find  fish  so  reared  are 
caught  by  others  living  outside  of  the  river  district,  and  in  a  whole- 
sale manner  by  stake-nets,  causing  the  rivers  to  become  neglected, 
and  the  supply  of  fish  to  become  very  limited.  So  long  as  plenty 
of  fish  are  allowed  to  pass  into  the  rivers,  they  will  be  protected 
whenever  they  show  signs  of  increase.  About  thirty  years  ago 
many  proprietors  would  say  to  me  that  their  stretch  of  river  brought 
them  so  little  return  that  they  were  not  troubling  to  look  after  it. 
Since  then,  however,  their  stretches  have  risen  in  value  to  the  extent 
of  300  or  400  per  cent. 

THE  SALMON  DISEASE 

The  salmon  disease  first  made  its  appearance  in  the  river  Eden 
at  Carlisle  ;  the  following  year  it  was  noticed  in  the  Tweed  ;  and  the 


144 


The   Salmon 


next  year  in  the  Tay.      No  one  has  yet  been  able  to  find  out  its  cause, 
nor  to  devise  a  remedy  for  it.      I   do  not  pretend  to  know  anything 


about  its  cause  or  cure,  but  I  have  seen  a  great  deal  of  it  in  the  Tay 
and    its   tributaries,    which   have   never    been    free    from    it    since    its 


The   Salmon 


145 


(LI 
,0 

= 


-3 


introduction.       During    some    seasons    it    is    worse    than    in    others, 
and  the  colder  the  weather 
the  worse  it  becomes. 

In  the  year  it  was 
first  known  it  commenced 
in  the  spring  by  attack- 
ing spring  fish.  In  the 
autumn,  again,  its  ravages 
commenced  in  September, 
and  continued  during  the 
whole  winter,  causing 
the  death  of  thousands  of 
fish.  Since  then  the 
autumn  fish  have  become 
affected  later  each  year, 
and  this  year  (1907)  very 
little  of  the  disease  was 
seen  among  the  autumn 
fish  until  December. 
Winter,  spring,  and  sum- 
mer fish,  however,  are 
more  or  less  affected 
throughout  the  whole  year 
when  they  enter  the  higher 
reaches.  This,  I  think,  is 
caused  by  the  clean  fish 
entering  the  district 
where  the  river  is  full  of 
old  diseased  fish.  If  so, 
these  spring  fish  infect 
the  summer  fish,  and  these 
latter  the  autumn  ones, 
and  this  goes  on  year  after  year. 

The  falls  of  Tummel,   Garry,   Lochy,    Dochart,   and    Lyon    help 

19 


o 


46 


The   Salmon 


the   disease    greatly,   for   the   fish    keep  jumping   at   these    falls    con- 
tinually   and    cut    themselves    on    the    rocks,    thus    rendering    them- 


HI 

o 

(U 


rt 
CO 


c 
o 


eS 
u 


0) 
M 

O 


O 

Tf 
J 


o 


selves  more  subject  to  the  disease.  They  cannot  proceed  farther, 
and  the  number  of  diseased  fish  soon  increases,  and  each  new 
fish  on  coming  among  them  becomes  affected,  so  that  the  pools 
below  the  falls  soon  swarm  with  them.  By  April  they  begin 


The   Salmon 


147 


to  die,  and  continue  to  drop  off  until  the  end  of  the  spawning 
season,  when  nearly  all  die.  So  infectious  is  the  disease  that  three 
years  ago  on  the  river 
Almond  about  a  hundred 
fish  died  per  day  in  a  dis- 
tance of  less  than  a  mile. 
Whenever  there  was  a  slight 
flood  in  the  river  large  num- 
bers of  fish  without  a  spot 
on  them  ascended,  and  in 
the  course  of  a  few  days 
nearly  all  became  affected 
and  died  (Fig.  146).  One 
or  two  white  spots  appear 
on  the  head  or  the  dor- 
sal fin.  These  are  at 
first  very  small,  but  in  two 
or  three  days  the  disease 
spreads  rapidly.  The  fish 
jumps  frequently,  as  if  to 
try  to  rid  itself  of  it,  but 
soon  becomes  exhausted 
and  dies.  Autumn  fish 
appear  better  able  to  with- 
stand the  disease  than 
spring  fish  just  from  the  sea, 
for  a  spring  fish  will  often 
die  with  only  one  spot 
on  its  head  no  larger  than 
a  shilling,  while  an  autumn 
fish  will  live  although  its 
body  is  almost  entirely  covered.  The  disease  takes  the  greatest 
hold  when  a  fish  is  about  to  spawn,  more  especially  if  the  weather 
be  cold,  and  many  hundreds  fall  victims  to  its  ravages.  The  accounts 


o 

~ 
en 


148 


The   Salmon 


, 


of  the   number   of   dead    diseased   fish    in    different    rivers    that    one 

frequently     reads,     do     not 
give  an  adequate  idea  of  the 
numbers  that  die,  for  when  a 
flood  comes  it  sweeps  them 
down  in  thousands,  and  they 
are   carried    out    to   sea    or 
left    in    the    estuaries,    and 
perhaps  not  one  in  fifty  is 
noticed.       All    the     season 
through  diseased  fish  drop 
back   daily,    many   of  them 
reaching     the     salt     water 
alive.       As     long     as     the 
river    continues    low   many 
can      remain      in      it,      but 
when    a    flood    comes   they 
are    unable    to     resist    the 
strength     of    the     current. 
Whenever    they    lose   con- 
trol of  themselves  they  roll 
over    and    very    soon    die. 
If    the    disease    died    with 
them    it    would    not    be   so 
serious,     but     weeks    after 
death  the  disease  continues 
to  develop,  until  every  part 
of  the  fish  is  covered  to  the 
depth   of  a    quarter    of   an 
inch.      In   Fig.    149   I   have 
scraped  away  a  part  to  show 
the  thickness  of  the  fungus. 
In  order  to  prove  that  fungus  attacks  dead  fish,  I  tied  a  clean  fish 
without  a  spot  on  it  to  a  stake  in  the  river  and  left  it  there  for  a  fort- 


FIG.  149. — Showing  fungus  developed  after  the  fish  was  dead 
for  a  considerable  time.      See  two  parts  scraped  off. 


The   Salmon 


149 


night.  On  my  going  back  I  found  fungus  had  attacked  it  in  the  same 
manner  as  on  a  living  fish.  When  the  fish  come  from  the  sea  they  appear 
to  be,  judging  from  outward  appearance,  entirely  free  from  disease,  as  no 


.  '•  -  \ 


-i- 


a, 

•Jl 


fc/3 

o 


O 

CJ 


spots  can  be  detected  on  them.  The  greatest  loss  through  the  disease 
is  to  the  net  fisher,  for  the  fish  that  die  have  been  of  no  service  whatever. 
Had  they  survived  they  would  have  become  kelts,  have  gone  to  the  sea, 
and  returned  as  clean  fish  double  or  treble  the  weight.  Not  only  so, 


150 


The   Salmon 


but  all  those  escaping  the  nets  would  have  spawned  had  not  the  disease 
attacked  them.      This  of  course  is  the  greatest  loss  of  all.      The  disease 


u 
o 


t/3 


rt 

c 


also  deprives  the  angler  of  part  of  his  sport.      When  the  fish  becomes 
affected  it  is  too~  much  concerned  with  trying  to  rid  itself  of  the  disease 


The   Salmon  '51 

to  have  time  to  look  at  the  angler's  lures.  Besides,  it  is  repeatedly 
jumping  out  of  the  water  at  various  angles,  and  while  under  water  is 
almost  constantly  rubbing  itself  against  the  bottom  or  on  rocks  or 
stones,  often  turning  on  its  back  and  sides  in  its  endeavour  to  be  rid 
of  the  fungus.  Loch  Tay  has  fallen  off  greatly  since  the  disease 
commenced,  and  the  wonder  is  that  the  supply  has  kept  up  so  well 
during  the  last  twenty  years.  Much  has  been  said  and  written  about 
preventing  the  disease,  but  little  or  nothing  has  been  done  towards 
stamping  it  out.  Of  course,  although  a  cure  were  discovered,  the 
difficulty  would  be  how  to  apply  it. 

I   am  of  opinion   that    if  all   proprietors  on   affected   rivers   were 

to  clear  away  all  obstacles  and  allow  the  fish    to   have   a   clear   run, 

they  would  distribute  themselves  over  the  whole  river  course,  instead 

of  as  at  present  being  huddled  together   under  weirs   and    falls   and 

in  polluted  parts  of  the  river.      Many  of  the  fish  would  thus  be  out  of 

reach  of  the  disease.      Every  fish  that  became  affected  in  the  higher 

reaches  during  spring    and  summer  should  be  destroyed  to  prevent 

the  rivers  from  becoming  polluted  for  the  autumn  run,  which   is  by 

far  the  largest.      If  the  disease  continued  it  would  be  advisable  to  erect 

a  barrier  across  the  river  and  catch  every  fish  that  came  up  in  spring 

and  summer,   and  keep  them   in   ponds  and  spawn   them.      Any  that 

showed  signs  of  disease  could  thus  easily  be  treated.      I    should  also 

recommend    that    all    dead    and    dying    fish    be    removed    from    the 

river.      Until  now  this  has  only  been  done  in  a  half-hearted  way.      Not 

only    salmon    but    sea-trout,    trout,   grayling,    and    even    sparling    are 

subject     to    the    disease.        Those    who    wish    to    study    the    salmon 

disease  should  read    77/6'   Cause  of  the  Salmon  Disease,  by  J.    Hume 

Patterson,    Glasgow.      On    page    12    he    sums    up   as    follows: — "  ist, 

The  Fungus  Saprolegnia  ferax  is  not  the  cause  of  the  salmon  disease. 

2nd,   The  disease  is  due  to  the  invasion  of  the  tissues  of  the  fish  by  a 

special  bacillus  (Bacillus   salmonis  pestis}.       3rd,   The    bacillus    gains 

access  through  abrasion  or  ulceration   of  the  skin,  and  the  disease  is 

apparently  not  contracted  when  the  skin  of  the  fish   is  in  a  healthy 

state.      4th,  Bacillus    salmonis  pestis   can   be    transmitted    from    dead 


I52  The   Salmon 

diseased  fish  to  other  dead  fish  in  the  same  water;  and  5th,  from  dead 
fish  to  living." 

I  do  not  agree  with  Dr.  Patterson,  however,  in  regard  to  No.  3 
above.  As  I  have  already  mentioned,  I  made  a  special  study  of  the  fish 
which  came  up  the  river  Almond  from  the  Tay.  Sometimes  about  a 
hundred  came  up  in  one  day  and  could  get  no  farther.  I  n  two  days  about 
half  of  these  fish  became  diseased,  and  in  other  two  days  the  remainder 
became  affected.  None  seemed  to  escape  and  almost  all  died.  Surely 
all  could  not  have  had  abrasion  or  ulceration  of  the  skin,  as  they 
had  no  rocks  to  pass  or  weirs  to  surmount,  and  were  only  one  mile 
from  tidal  water. 

I  have  always  wondered  how  a  salmon  was  able  to  take  care  of 
itself  in  the  sea,  for  we  see  them  brought  ashore  without  a  scratch  or 
a  scale  ruffled.  I  believe  that  every  salmon  on  entering  a  river  is 
subject  to  disease.  Fish,  if  not  badly  affected  while  spawning,  often 
revive  in  the  kelt  stage,  go  to  the  sea,  and  return  again.  About 
April  many  of  the  kelts  heal  up  quickly.  It  is  not  so,  however,  with 
the  clean  fish  ;  they  continue  falling  clown  the  river,  and  are  daily 
caught  in  the  nets.  I  have  been  told  that  since  the  storage  of  water 
was  commenced  in  the  Helmsdale  the  disease  has  disappeared. 
Before  the  water  was  stored  I  have  counted  dead  fish  by  the  score  in  it. 

Dr.  Patterson  says  Bacillus  sahnonis  pcstis  grows  well  in  the  sea 
water,  whereas  Saprolegnia  does  not  grow.  Therefore  a  diseased 
salmon  entering  the  sea  and  returning  to  the  river  apparently  free 
from  fungus  cannot  be  said  to  be  free  from  the  disease.  Many  people 
believe  that  a  diseased  salmon  on  entering  salt  water  is  cured  of  the 
disease  ;  if  this  were  the  case  there  would  be  some  chance  of  its 
dying  out,  but  there  is  not  the  least  doubt  that  Dr.  Patterson  is 
right,  for  if  it  were  not  so  the  disease  might  appear  in  one  river 
and  not  in  another.  I  am  strongly  of  opinion  that  the  disease 
came  from  the  Eden  at  Carlisle,  where  it  first  made  its  appearance  ; 
that  from  there  it  was  carried  to  the  East  Coast  by  gulls,  found  its 
way  to  the  Tweed,  and  from  thence  to  all  the  rivers  north  of  the 
Tweed  as  far  as  to  the  Thurso  on  the  North  Coast. 


SEA-TROUT 

(Sa hiio  trutta] 

THE  sea- trout  is  one  of  the  best  sporting  fish  we  have  in  Great 
Britain,  and  is,  besides,  of  greater  value  than  any  others  to  those 
who  are  fortunate  enough  to  possess  waters  that  contain  them.  They 
are  netted  in  great  numbers  in  our  rivers  and  in  the  sea,  and  when 
we  consider  the  vast  quantities  that  are  sent  not  only  to  our  own 
markets,  but  also  to  those  on  the  Continent,  the  revenue  derived  from 
them  must  be  very  great. 

I  consider  the  sea-trout  distinct  from  the  salmon  and  grilse. 
Any  one  who  has  the  opportunity  of  observing  them  proceed  up  a 
river  can  prove  this  by  the  way  in  which  they  run.  No  matter  what 
its  size  may  be,  the  sea-trout  always  runs  in  a  zig-zag  fashion — first  to 
the  one  side  and  then  to  the  other.  The  salmon,  on  the  other  hand, 
runs  in  a  straight  direction.  Another  way  of  knowing  the  sea-trout 
is  by  counting  the  number  of  scales.  There  are  fourteen  from  the 
adipose  or  dead  fin  to  the  lateral  line.  The  salmon,  on  the  other  hand, 
as  may  be  seen  from  the  illustration,  has  ten  (Fig.  153).  By  counting 
the  scales,  then,  is  a  simple  way  of  distinguishing  between  them, 
and  is  so  sure  a  guide  that  no  mistake  need  be  made.  From  the 
photographs  of  sea-trout,  both  large  and  small,  which  are  given  it  will 
be  seen  that  they  vary  a  great  deal. 

Having  made  a  careful  study  of  this  subject  for  thirty  years,  and 
having  collected  all  the  information  I  could  bearing  upon  it,  I  have 
come  to  the  conclusion  that  the  sea-trout  is  the  same  fish  as  that  which 
is  called  white  trout,  bull-trout,  gray  trout,  peel,  sewin,  brith-dail, 
salmon-trout,  and  many  other  names.  In  the  grilse  stage  it  is  known 

153  20 


154 


Sea -Trout 


•8 


a 
h 
D 


rt 
u 


(U 

tn 


o 


eS 

<u 


Sea-Trout 


155 


as  herling,  whitling,  Finnock,  Lammasmen,  etc.  ;  while  in  the  smolt 
stage  it  is  called  yellow-fin,  orange-fin,  black-fin,  and  silver-white. 
In  fact,  almost  every  district  has  a  different  name  for  each  of  the 
three  stages.  While  much  confusion  is  thus  caused,  it  would  be  a 


FIG.  153. — Salmon,  showing  number  of  scales  from  adipose  fin  to  lateral  line  to  be  ten. 

very  simple  matter  to  call  them  sea-trout,  in  the  grilse  stage  whitling, 
and  in  the  smolt  stage  yellow-fin  (Fig.  155). 

The  history  of  the  sea-trout  differs  widely  from  that  of  the  salmon  ; 
but  I  shall  explain  this  later.  It  is  often  difficult  to  tell  a  parr  of  the 
yellow -fin  before  its  fin  becomes  yellow,  although  those  who  have 
experience  in  dealing  with  them  have  no  trouble  whatever  in  dis- 


156 


Sea -Trout 


tinguishing  them  at  a  glance.  In  marking  the  salmon  smolts  we  are 
not  aware  of  having  made  a  single  mistake  in  this  connection,  although 
there  were  plenty  of  yellow-fins  also  in  the  net,  and  no  wired  sea-trout 
have  been  caught.  Although  yellow-fin  is  the  name  applied  to  the  smolt 
stage  of  the  sea-trout,  it  must  not  be  understood  all  have  yellow  fins, 


FIG.  154. — Sea-trout,  showing  scales  from  the  adipose  fin  to  the  lateral  line. 

The  four  specks  are  sea-lice. 

for  many  have  their  fins  of  quite  as  dark  a  colour  as  those  of  a  salmon 
smolt  (Fig.  156).  As  a  rule,  the  yellow-fins  are  larger  than  the 
salmon  smolts,  and  this  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  the 
former  are  from  a  month  to  six  weeks  older,  and  therefore  have  an 
earlier  start  than  the  salmon  smolts. 

I  am  of  opinion  that  the  yellow-fins  do  not  go  far  out  to  sea 
before  returning  as  whitling  (Fig.  157)  about  the  end  of  June. 
During  the  whole  season  we  catch  them,  in  the  estuary,  in  all  stages 


Sea -Trout 


157 


rt 

<u 


o 
g 


_o 

<L 


.— 
'5: 

,  o 


158 


Sea-Trout 


up  to  half  a  pound.     A  study  of  the  scales  goes  to  prove  that  after 
going  down  and  returning  as  whitling  they  have  only  been  from  three 


H 

*• 
u 


o 
tf 

bJ3 

O 
rt 


O 

•Jr. 


o 


v£) 


to  four  months  away.  If  yellow-fins  are  prevented  from  reaching  the 
sea  by  being  confined  in  a  loch,  they  will  become  sea-trout  and  weigh 
about  1 6  oz.  by  the  end  of  the  year,  and  appear  quite  as  bright  as  those 


Sea-Trout 


159 


just  returned  from  the  sea.  The  one  from  which  the  illustration  (Fig. 
158)  was  taken  was  a  perfect  specimen  when  I  caught  it.  The  yellow- 
fins,  then,  which  return  about  the  end  of  June,  have  only  been  three 
months  in  the  sea.  At  first  they  are  very  small,  weighing  only  about  a 
quarter  of  a  pound,  but  they  continue  to  increase  in  size  up  to  the  end  of 
November,  when  the  largest  weigh  about  i  Ib.  While  they  remain  in 
fresh  water  they  feed  on  larvae,  flies,  worms,  etc.,  the  greater  number 
of  them,  however,  prefer  the  tidal  water,  and  in  the  Tay  very  few  are 
caught  more  than  ten  miles  above  this.  They  remain  in  the  river 
until  the  end  of  December,  when  they  begin  to  go  down  in  consider- 


FIG.  157. — ^-lb.  Whitling.     First  return  from  the  sea.     July  1900. 

able  numbers.  Of  course,  some  may  go  down  somewhat  earlier,  but 
from  December  until  the  beginning  of  May  they  are  constantly  going 
down,  and,  if  the  weather  is  warm,  practically  all  will  have  disappeared 
from  the  river  by  the  ist  of  May.  Their  condition  greatly  depends  on 
whether  the  winter  has  been  cold  or  warm,  and,  of  course,  the 
warmer  the  weather  the  better  will  be  their  condition,  as  they  have 
more  to  feed  on  and  are  more  inclined  to  feed  then.  During  some 
seasons  they  are  so  thin  that  they  have  the  appearance  of  kelts ; 
but  by  October  and  November,  if  the  weather  is  warm,  they  are 
in  good  condition  again,  and  the  same  applies  to  the  months  of  March 
and  April.  When  the  March  browns  and  blue  duns  appear  on  the 
river,  the  whitling  feed  ravenously  and  seldom  allow  a  fly  to  pass. 


i6o 


Sea -Trout 


I    now  come   to   a   point   on  which    there    is   great   difference   of 
opinion,  namely,  whether,  while  in  this  stage,  they  spawn  and  become 


1) 

c 


O 
o 

II 


0 

o 


oi 

,. 


O 

o 


o 

ri 


N 

O 


00 


kelts.  My  opinion  is  they  do  not  spawn.  I  have  seen  them  at  all 
times  and  have  looked  for  one  with  ova,  but  never  found  one. 
Poachers  catch  them  all  through  the  winter  and  always  find  a  ready 


Sea -Trout 


161 


sale  for  them.  They  are  sold  in  the  open  market,  too,  all  through  the 
spring,  and  anglers  are  allowed  to  catch  them.  In  some  rivers  the 
autumn  months  are  the  best  for 
catching  them,  while  in  others  they 
take  more  freely  in  the  spring. 
In  the  Tay  and  the  Earn  spring 
is  the  best  time.  On  one  occasion, 
on  the  roth  March,  I  caught  with 
fly  eighty  of  them,  averaging  three- 
quarters  of  a  pound  in  weight. 
The  largest,  which  scaled  one  and 
a  quarter  pounds,  is  the  largest 
I  have  ever  caught.  In  July, 
August,  and  September  thousands 
of  small  whitling  are  caught  and 
called  sea-trout.  These  would  be 
better  left  in  the  river,  as  they 
are  little  better  than  smolts.  If 
this  were  done  the  number  of  sea- 
trout  would  soon  greatly  increase. 

From  what  has  been  said  it 
will  be  seen  that  the  habits  of  the 
sea-trout  differ  widely  from  those 
of  the  salmon,  and  these  differ- 
ences may  be  summed  up  as 
follows  :-- (i)  The  sea -trout 
comes  into  fresh  water  nearly  a 
year  before  the  grilse  of  the 
salmon.  (2)  It  feeds  in  fresh 
water,  which  the  salmon  does  not. 
(3)  It  does  not  spawn  on  its  first 
return  to  fresh  water.  After  the 
whitling  goes  to  sea  it  remains  there  for  three  or  four  months,  and 

comes  up  as  a  sea-trout  from   i  to  2^-  Ibs.,  according  to  the  length  of 

21 


— 


— 


l62 


Sea -Trout 


time   it   remains  in   the  sea  (Fig.    161).       In   the  earliest  rivers  they 
begin  to  run  in  January,  although  only  in  small  numbers,  and  continue 


£ 

0 


o 
V 
X 


rt 
D 

C/3 


o 

o 


c3 
C/3 

,2 


till  October,  but  of  course  the  seasons  have  a  great  deal   to  do  with 
their  running  early  or  late. 


Sea-Trout 


163 


The   Tay,  I  dare  say,  is   the  earliest  river  in   Great   Britain,  and 
one  would  expect  them  in   it  as  early  as  in  any  river.      Every  spring 


O 
CN 


rt 

3 


CS 
H 


tD 


rt 
o 


o 

t_l 

rt 


paragraphs  appear  in   the  public  press  stating   that  most  of  the  sea- 
trout  caught  in  early  spring  are  kelts  (Fig.  162).      I  have  the  numbers 


164 


Sea -Trout 


caught  in  our  nets  on  the  Tay  for  the  last  eight  years.     The  average 

number  in  February  is  20  ;  in  March, 
300  ;  in  April,  400  ;  in  May  they  quickly 
increase  in  numbers,  and  continue  to  do  so 
till  the  middle  of  July,  when  few  come  up. 
They  are  then  caught  mostly  in  the  lower 
reaches  of  the  tidal  part  of  the  river. 
Most  of  these  are  large  and  much  inferior 
in  quality  to  the  earlier  ones. 

Strange  to  say,  on  the  5th  February  of 
this  year  (1908)  we  caught  more  sea-trout 
at  one   station — Almond    Mouth — in   one 

FIG.  163.— ii  oz.    2;th  April  1907.       day  tnan  we   had   caught   in   a   month  in 

some  other  seasons.  Since  then  they  have  greatly  increased,  and  we 
are  now  (24th  April  1908)  get- 
ting from  100  to  120  daily,  all 
in  perfect  condition,  averag- 
ing about  i^  Ibs.  in  weight. 
None  of  these  have  spawned,  al- 
though all  will  spawn  this  season. 
These  sea-trout  are  now  a  little 
over  three  years  of  age,  and  are 
on  their  second  return  from  the 
sea.  Now  the  grilse  of  the  sal- 
mon have  not  yet  returned  once 
to  the  fresh  water,  nor  will  they  do 
so  until  the  middle  of  May  or  the 
beginning  of  June.  Nodoubtthe 
mild  autumn  and  spring  had  some- 
thing to  do  with  the  running  of 
these  sea-trout  so  early,  and  with 
their  being  in  such  fine  condition. 
All  these  sea-trout  will  hasten  on  to  the  higher  reaches  and  will  go  as  far 
as  the  water  will  allow  them.  The  age  of  these  sea-trout  can  be  ascer- 


FIG.  164.  —  i  Ib.     Caught  at  sea,  3ist  July  1907. 


Sea -Trout 


165 


tained  from  their  scales  as  in  a  grilse,  with  this  difference,  that  in  the 
whitling  stage  new  rings  are  added  during  their  stay  in  both  salt  and  fresh 
water.  The  number  of  rings  will  be  found  to  be  forty-nine,  making 
them  the  same  age  as  the  grilse,  which  have  not  yet  returned  from  the  sea. 
I  give  also  a  few  illustrations  of  the  scales  of  sea-trout  of  different 
sizes  (Figs.  163,  164,  165).  The  sea-trout  weighing  about  i^  Ibs., 


FIG.  165.— 9  Ibs.     Coquet,  25th  July  1907. 

as  I  have  already  said,  run  up  as  far  as  the  water  will  take  them 
and  spawn  about  the  beginning  of  October.  They  select  gravel  of  a 
non-shifting  nature  and  very  much  finer  than  that  which  the  salmon 
selects.  Their  movement  in  spawning  is  very  much  quicker  than  that 
of  a  salmon,  and  they  take  much  less  time  to  deposit  their  spawn, 
this  only  occupying  them  from  two  to  four  days.  After  spawning  they 
become  kelts,  fall  back  into  the  pools,  become  very  lean,  and  remain  in 
the  pools  for  some  time,  until  they  recover  from  its  effects.  They 


1 66 


Sea-Trout 


then  roam  about  and  feed  freely,  and  come  into  so  good  condition  by 
April  that  one  has  some  difficulty  in  recognising  them  as  kelts.      By 


go 

rt 
o 


rt 

W2 
,0 

-D 

00 

T 

vd 


studying  the  scales,  however,  one  can  easily  make  sure  of  his  ground, 
as  scales  taken  from  a  kelt  are  always  broken  at  the  edges.     These  kelts 


Sea -Trout 


167 


go  down  from  January  to  May,  and  some  of  them  return  again  in  July, 
double  what  they  weighed  on  going  down.     Others  remain  longer  in  the 


o 

1-1 

a 


rt 


sea.  and  come  up  in  February,  weighing  from  3  to  5  Ibs.,  while  others 
remain  till  July  and  are  from  5  to  8  Ibs.     Those  that  are  on  their  second 


1 68 


Sea -Trout 


return  from  the  sea  and  have  not  spawned  are  in  the  best  of  condition, 
and  are  so  pink-fleshed  and  so  well  flavoured  that  I  think  no  fish  are 


& 

"3 

H-> 

,C 


c 

rt 


cr 
o 
U 


eS 
<u 
X 


00 


better  than  they  are  from  April  to  the  middle  of  July.     After  spawning 
they  resemble  the  salmon,  become  white  in  the  flesh,  and  much  coarser. 


Sea-Trout 


169 


Sea-trout  occasionally  grow  to   a   very  large  size.      One   was  got 
in   the  nets  at  Ballathie  weighing    18^  Ibs.  (Fig.  166),  and  we  caught 


3 
I—, 

4= 


•/> 

r^ 


rt 


V 

CT 
o 
U 


E 

o 


rt 
I) 
C/3 


O 


one  on  28th  June  1907  weighing  19^  Ibs.  This  was  the  finest  speci- 
men I  have  ever  seen  (Fig.  152).  We  often  capture  sea-trout  from 
6  to  12  Ibs.,  but  very  seldom  do  we  get  monsters  like  this. 

All   round   our  coasts   the    sea   swarms   with   sea-trout,  they   are 


22 


Sea -Trout 


found   in  Orkney,  Shetland,  and    the  Outer   Hebrides.       In  the  river 
Grimersta   they   are   also   plentiful.      On   one    occasion    I    visited  the 


tv. 

o 


cn 

c 
<u 

D 


O 

CJ 


c 

o 


8. 

CL, 

in 


latter  to   study   the   kelt   sea-trout,    and   in   April    I   caught   many    in 
good  condition,  dissected  them,  and  found  they  had  been  feeding  on 


Sea -Trout 


171 


the   larvae   of  Ephemerae  and  caddis  flies.      Most   of  the   clean   ones 
were   newly  from  the   sea  and  weighed  about   i    lb.,  but  no   large  run 


V 


rt 
l) 

C/) 


of  sea-trout  takes  place  in  the  Lewis  until  later  in  the  season.  In 
the  Kyles  of  Durness  and  Tongue  large  numbers  are  taken  with 
sand  eel  and  minnows.  The  river  Laxford  and  Loch  Stack  swarm 
with  sea-trout,  where  there  are  no  nets  to  reduce  their  number. 


172 


Sea -Trout 


In  a  dry  season  sea-trout  collect  in  great  numbers  at  the  mouths 
of  small  streams,  and  seem  desperately  eager  to  obtain  a  little  fresh 
water.  When  in  this  excited  state  I  have  tried  to  catch  them  in  the  sea, 


6JO 


rt 


rt 
<U 

C/3 


OO 


but  could  not  persuade  them  to  look  at  a  fly.  It  is  quite  different,  how- 
ever, in  Shetland,  where  sea-trout  often  take  a  fly  quite  freely  in  the 
sea.  Sea-trout  run  much  faster  than  salmon,  and  being  smaller  they  can 


Sea -Trout 


O 

ON 


rt 

H 


2 


<u 

en 


.a 

00 


Sea -Trout 


o 

<5 


, 

ri 
H 


oo 

o 


rt 
C/3 

<-*H 
O 
in 

(U 

Oi 


Sea-Trout 


/5 


t/0 


rt 

<U> 


Q 
I 


Sea -Trout 


T3 
rt 


C/) 


o 

u 

c/: 


<u 

en 

0> 


t/J 

3 
cj 
u 


CS 

u 

X 


Sea-Trout  i77 

run  with  much  less  water.      During  summer  they  may  be  seen  run- 
ning over  weirs  and  up  shallows  writh  their  backs  above  water.      In 


O 

ON 


Cfl 

UH 

O 
I/) 

oi 


summer,  a  mild  night  when   there  is  a  little   fresh  water  in   the   river 
is  their  favourite   time  for  running,  but  slight  frost  soon  stops  them. 


78 


Sea -Trout 


In    high    water    the     sea- trout     appear     to    evade    the    lower    nets, 
as  most  of  those  caught  are  got  in  the  higher  ones. 


BULL-TROUT 

I  am  inclined  to  think  bull- 
trout are  neither  more  nor  less 
than  sea- trout,  and  why  they 
are  called  bull-trout  I  cannot 
tell,  for  I  have  examined  many 
and  can  find  no  difference  be- 
tween them  and  sea-trout.  The 
river  Coquet  in  Northumber- 
land is  famous  for  its  bull-trout, 
which  come  up  in  large  numbers 
in  June,  and  continue  to  increase 
in  number  until  the  spawning 
season.  Those  running  in  the 
earlier  part  of  the  season  are  in  so 
fine  condition  that  it  is  difficult  to 
tell  them  from  salmon.  Many  of 
them  are  from  5  to  10  Ibs.  in 
weight,  and  when  in  good  con- 
dition they  are  really  very  hand- 
some fish  ;  but  for  the  table  they 
are  inferior  to  salmon,  their  flesh 
being  white  as  a  rule.  I  think, 
then,  that  instead  of  being  called 
bull-trout  they  ought  to  be  called 
sea-trout.  The  younger  ones, 
weighing  from  i  to  3  Ibs.,  are  excellent  for  the  table,  but  as  they 
grow  older  they  become  coarser  and  whiter  in  the  flesh.  The 
feeding  may  have  something  to  do  with  this. 


o 


rt 
<u 

in 


Sea -Trout  i79 

At  one  time  the  Coquet  was  a  splendid  salmon  and  grilse  river, 
but  now  holds  very  few.  This  is  not  to  be  wondered  at,  as  the 
passage  over  so  many  high  weirs  prevents  salmon  reaching  the 
higher  parts  of  the  river  to  spawn.  A  sea-trout  will  surmount  weirs 
and  go  through  difficult  fish-passes  where  a  salmon  would  fail.  I  am 
at  present  designing  fish-passes  for  these  weirs  to  allow  salmon  to  pass 
up,  and  I  hope  to  see  the  time  when  salmon  will  again  be  plentiful 
in  this  river. 

I  have  compared  these  so-called  bull-trout  with  the  sea-trout  of 
the  Tay,  which  are  never  called  bull-trout,  and  I  can  find  no  difference 
except  that  the  large  ones  in  the  Tay  are  better  fed.  They  have  all 
the  same  number  of  scales — fourteen  from  the  adipose  fin  to  the  lateral 
line.  Many  of  them  are  supposed  to  be  crosses  between  a  salmon  and 
a  sea-trout,  which  no  doubt  some  of  them  are.  I  give  the  photograph  of 
one  which  the  fishermen  of  the  Coquet  thought  to  be  a  cross  (Fig.  i/o). 
What  the  result  of  the  after-cross  would  be  I  leave  others  to  judge. 
These  sea-trout  are  distributed  over  the  whole  of  Great  Britain,  but 
are  more  plentiful  in  the  Coquet  and  in  the  Tweed  than  in  any  other 
river  I  know  of.  As  anglers  are  the  people  who  are  chiefly  concerned 
with  the  life-history  of  the  Salmonidae,  there  ought  to  be  some  simple 
way  for  their  determining  what  salmon,  sea-trout,  and  trout  are, 
without  having  to  wade  through  books  and  become  more  confused 
than  ever.  Salmo  salar  should  be  called  fry,  parr,  smolt,  salmon  ; 
foul  salmon  in  the  spawning  season,  and  kelt  salmon  after  spawning. 
Salmo  trutta  should  be  called  fry,  parr,  yellow-fin,  sea-trout  ;  and  if  a 
further  distinction  is  wished,  grilse  could  be  called  young  salmon, 
and  whitling  young  sea-trout. 

In  small  rivers,  such  as  the  Dovey  in  North  Wales,  where  salmon 
have  been  over-netted  and  poached,  they  have  decreased  while  the  sea- 
trout  have  increased,  showing  that  sea-trout  are  more  difficult  to 
exterminate  than  salmon.  When  on  this  river  not  long  ago  I  found 
that  the  belief  amongst  fishermen  there  is,  that  the  sea-trout — Salmo 
trutta — -is  different  from  the  bull-trout ;  but  besides  sea-trout  and  bull- 
trout they  have  another  which  they  call  brith  dail,  because  it  is 


i  So 


Sea-Trout 


different  in  colour,  having  red  spots,  and  being  much  redder  all  over. 
Judging  from  the  specimens  of  these  sea-trout  which  I  saw,  I  have  no 
hesitation  in  stating  that  they  are  exactly  the  same  as  we  have  on  the 
Tay.  It  is  thus  most  confusing  that  in  almost  every  locality  the  same 
fish  should  be  called  by  different  names,  at  different  periods,  simply 
because  they  change  their  colour  with  the  seasons.  I  wonder  what  an 


FIG.   179. — Gill  of  a  2O-lb.  Salmon  which  has  spawned  and  returned  as  a  clean  fish,  showing  maggots  on 

gill,  which  is  partly  eaten  away. 

ornithologist  would  say  if  we  called  the  ptarmigan  white  grouse  in  the 
winter,  yellow  grouse  in  the  breeding  season,  and  grey  grouse  in  the 
autumn,  simply  from  its  colour  ! 

The  sea-trout  in  summer  is  silvery,  in  autumn  grey  with  more 
spots  showing,  and  in  the  spawning  season  red.  I  do  not  think  it 
advisable  to  encourage  large  sea-trout  in  the  clean  state  for  sport- 
ing purposes,  for  when  they  grow  large  they  seldom  take  fly,  and  in 
the  kelt  state  rise  freely  and  will  take  almost  any  bait.  I  attribute  the 


Sea -Trout 


181 


inferior  quality  of  the   large  sea-trout  to  its  having  spawned,  and  the 
oftener  it  spawns  the  coarser  it  becomes. 

There  is  yet 
another  fish  —  the 
so-called  salmon 
bull-trout.  These 
are  found  in  all 
our  rivers  in  which 

salmon   are    found.     m&aBS£iaaa&3[:     •.  .-  ^S&&B3S9t&?&D     - 

In  my  first  edition 
of  this  work  I  said 
these  fish  grow  to 
as  large  a  size  as 
the  largest  salmon. 
Since  then  I  have 
had  reason  to  alter 
my  views  as  I  find 
this  is  not  the  case. 
Of  those  which 
have  come  under 
my  notice  the 
heaviest  scaled  42 
Ibs.  and  I  find  very 
few  to  attain  the 


VJ^V'^'V-       >-li">-  >^f^"L-   ~4jjrHL  ,'  rtgjBBBt.'Kr  VJ'IF 

this  should  happen 

as   the   time    ocu-  ^^ 


s- 


5   a. 


u 


o 


•-    rt 

*•*  .-2 

"=  '"? 

r—*      "* 
C< 

O 

S 

"rt 

C/3 


as  the  time  occu- 
pied  in  spawning 
takes  the  fish  away 

j 

from  the  sea  where 

the  increase  in  weight  takes  place.     They  are  readily  distinguished  from 

the  salmon  by  the  number  of  spots  appearing  along  their  sides,  and  as  a 


Sea  -Trout 


rule  the  head  is  shorter  and  parasites  are  always  present  in  their  gills. 


V 

c 


tJ) 


o 

c 


O 


c 

)M 

3 


O 

_§ 

15 

C/2 

>, 

rt 
H 


co 
o 


In   fact,  the  more  spots  there  are  on  their  sides  the  more  parasites  are 
there  in  their  gills,  and  sometimes  the  gills  are  nearly  eaten  away.     See 


Sea-Trout  183 

illustration  of  a  gill  (Fig.  179),  and  also  illustration  of  the  difference 
between  a  salmon  (Fig.  181)  and  a  salmon  bull-trout  (Fig.  180). 
Occasionally  one  does  come  across  a  fish  having  spawned  and  returned 
as  a  clean  fish  with  no  spots  on  its  sides  but,  if  the  gills  be  inspected 
parasites  are  always  present.  These  fish  are  inferior  to  the  salmon, 
and  usually  bring  twopence  to  threepence  per  pound  less  in  the  market. 
Their  flesh  is  often  whiter  and  not  so  well  flavoured.  Having  had 
several  bull-trout  from  the  Tweed,  I  could  discern  a  great  difference 
between  them  and  the  bull-trout  of  the  Tay.  Several  years  ago  I  drew 
the  attention  of  Sir  Herbert  Maxwell  to  them,  and  he  was  astonished  to 
hear  that  we  had  bull-trout  up  to  40  Ibs.  and  over.  Having  captured 
one  42  Ibs.  shortly  afterwards,  I  sent  him  a  photograph  of  it,  and  he 
declared  it  to  be  a  bull-trout.  I  also  brought  them  under  the  notice 
of  Dr.  Kingston  Barton  for  examination,  and  he  found  them  to  be 
seventeen  per  cent  richer  in  fat  than  other  salmon. 

When  he  called  one  day  at  our  fish-house,  I  drew  his  attention  to 
the  spots  on  the  fish,  and  he  thought  the  richness  of  the  feeding  might 
cause  these  as  well  as  the  parasites  in  the  gills.  Since  then  our 
marking  of  fish  on  the  Tay  has  clearly  proved  that  the  so-called  bull- 
trout of  the  Tay  and  many  other  rivers  are  true  salmon.  These  bull- 
trout should  not,  of  course,  be  confused  with  the  bull-trout  of  the 
sea-trout.  The  former  have  the  same  number  of  scales  from  the 
dead  fin  to  the  lateral  line  as  the  salmon.  All  the  grilse  kelts,  small 
spring  fish  kelts,  and  in  fact  all  the  kelts  which  we  marked,  were 
so-called  bull-trout  when  they  returned  again.  I  have  watched 
them  carefully  in  our  fish-house,  and  in  July  1907  there  were  nineteen 
per  cent  of  them.  (For  further  information  see  page  64.) 

It  is  remarkable  that  almost  all  the  bull-trout  are  females,  and 
this  is,  no  doubt,  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  there  is  greater 
mortality  among  the  males  during  the  spawning  season,  thus  leaving 
few  but  females  to  mark.  From  the  study  of  these  I  am  now  con- 
vinced that  all  fish — salmon,  grilse  and  sea-trout — that  have  spawned 
are  inferior  to  fish  that  have  not  spawned.  It  was  indeed  an  "eye- 
opener"  to  me  to  find  one  of  our  wired  smolts  of  1905  return  on  9th 


1 84 


Sea -Trout 


August    1907    for   the    first   time   weighing    27   Ibs.,    for    hitherto   we 

thought  fish  of  this  size 
caught    in    the    autumn 


o 

C- 
If, 


C/2 


rt 

rt" 
D 


had  been  in  the  river 
before  and  had  spawned. 
Still  more  convincing  is 
the  fact  that  we  have 
never  captured  a  Tay 
bull-trout  that  has  not 
spawned,  clearly  proving 
what  I  have  already 
said.  A  reference  to 
the  illustrations  of  the 
scales  will  explain  this 
more  clearly.  The  illus- 
trations of  these  salmon 
should  also  be  examined 
and  the  spots  noted 
(Fig.  182).  These  may 
be  from  the  grilse  that 
have  spawned,  from  the 
small  spring  fish,  or  from 
the  larger  fish. 

The  largest  female 
I  have  noticed,  that  had 
spawned,  was  caught 
by  Mr.  Archibald  Coats, 
and  weighed  39  Ibs.  (see 
illustration,  Fig.  180  ; 
also  one  of  42  Ibs.,  Fig. 
182).  Illustrations  are 
also  given  of  the  scales 

of  bull-trout  from  the  grilse,  from  the  small  spring  fish,  and  from   the 

larger  fish  (Fig.  81). 


c 
o 
<J 
<u 

CO 


o 


•s. 


CO 


ILLUSTRATIONS  SHOWING  HOW  TO  DISTINGUISH  A  SALMON  FROM  A  SEA-TROUT 

BY  THE  SITUATION  OF  THE  EYE 


FIG.  183. — 8-lb.  Male  Sea-Trout  or  Bull-Trout.     The  Till.      1st  August  1911. 
Showing  the  eye  above  the  level  of  the  mouth.     The  same  can  be  seen  in  the  smolt  stage. 


—  _/~    «• 


FIG.  184.  —  i6-ll).  FemaK- Salmnn.     The  Tay.      August  1911. 
Showing  the  eye  below  the  level  of  the  mouth.      The  same  can  be  seen  in  the  smolt  stage. 

24 


1 86 


Sea -Trout 


FIG.  185.— 5-lb.  Female  Sea-Trout.     The  Tay.     August  1911. 
Showing  the  eye  above  the  level  of  the  mouth. 


-gffljf? 


•     "  "  .  .••*-'  •-•• 


Fi<;.   186.— 2-lb.  Brown  Trout.     August  1911. 
Showing  the  eye  a&ove  the  level  of  the  mouth. 


HABITS  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  BROWN  TROUT 

(Salmo  fario] 

To  the  angler  the  common  yellow  trout  is  by  far  the  most  im- 
portant fish  that  swims,  for  more  people  capture  it  than  any  other 
living  thing.  The  pleasure  derived  from  its  capture,  too,  surpasses 
that  of  any  other  sport,  while  interest  in  the  study  of  the  trout  seems 
to  be  inexhaustible.  Its  shape  and  colour  are  so  beautiful  that  no 
artist  can  reproduce  them.  Many  naturalists  maintain  that  there  are 
different  species  of  trout  in  the  British  Islands — Loch  Leven  trout, 
Gillaroo  trout,  tidal  trout,  and  many  others  ;  but  from  a  close  study 
of  all  these  trout  for  the  last  forty  years,  I  have  come  to  the  conclusion 
that  there  is  only  one  species  of  trout  in  Great  Britain,  and  that  in 
the  different  varieties  the  differences  are  caused  by  the  nature  of  the 
water  in  which  they  are  found  and  by  the  food  they  eat.  I  therefore 
hope  that  what  I  have  to  say  will  help  to  solve  some  of  the  mysteries 
connected  with  this  wonderful  trout. 

The  spawning  time  of  trout  depends  on  the  locality,  and  begins 
about  the  i5th  of  October  and  continues  till  March.  The  spawn  is 
generally  deposited  in  places  where  the  gravel  is  fairly  fine,  and  remains 
there  for  a  period  according  to  the  temperature  of  the  water.  If  the 
temperature  averages  54°  it  remains  thirty-two  days  ;  if  50°,  forty-seven 
days  ;  if  43°,  eighty-nine  days.  The  fry  when  hatched  come  up  through 
the  gravel,  and  like  the  salmon  fry  have  a  sack  attached  to  their  bodies. 
This  sack  contains  enough  nourishment  to  sustain  them  for  several 
weeks  before  they  are  able  to  feed.  On  their  beginning  to  do  so  they 

grow   so   rapidly  that    if  hatched    on   the    ist   of   March   and    food    is 

187 


1 88 


Brown   Trout 


plentiful,    they   may   attain    a    length   of   6    inches    by   October.       As 


00 

o 


V 

c 


C 

_a 
— 
<u 

-C 

c/5 


1_ 

c 

f 

00 

c 


a    rule,    however,    they    are    smaller,    and    by    the    following    March 
do    not    exceed    this     length.       During     the    winter    months     they 


Brown  Trout 


189 


FIG.  1 88.  —  i  oz.     Loch  Leven. 
1st  February  1906. 


FIG.  189. — ^  lb.     Loch  Leven.     22nd  August  1906. 


FIG.  191.  —  ii  Ibs.     Loch  Leven. 
25th  July  1906. 


FIG.  190. — |  lb.     Loch  Leven.     August  1906. 


190 


Brown  Trout 


feed  very  little,  owing  to  the  scarcity  of  food  at  this  season.  They 
then  hide  under  stones  and  banks,  and  in  deep  holes  out  of  the 
reach  of  their  enemies. 

When  the  weather  becomes  warm,  about  the  beginning  of  April, 
they  leave  their  winter  quarters  and  roam  about  in  search  of  food. 
Towards  the  end  of  April  a  great  change  comes  over  them — a  change 

almost  as  great  as  that  from  a  parr  to  a 
smolt.  They  now  assume  a  silvery  coat, 
and  it  is  difficult  to  tell  them  from  the 
smolt  of  the  sea-trout.  During  the  summer 
they  feed  on  worms,  flies,  larvae,  beetles, 
shell-fish,  and  many  different  kinds  of  flies 
that  are  blown  on  to  the  loch  or  stream 
from  the  land.  By  March  of  the  following 
year,  if  the  feeding  has  been  fairly  good, 
they  will  be  from  8  to  9  inches  long,  and 
will  weigh  about  4  oz.  I  have  seen  some, 
which  were  kept  in  confinement  and 
regularly  fed,  weigh  2  Ibs.  in  two  years. 
The  milder  the  climate  the  more  food 
there  is  and  the  trout  have  a  longer  season  to  feed  in,  con- 
sequently they  become  larger  in  a  shorter  period.  In  a  loch  a 
three-years-old  trout  is  usually  about  three-quarters  of  a  pound, 
while  in  streams  they  are  usually  much  smaller. 

In  quick- running  streams  containing  little  food,  many,  when 
three  years  old,  will  not  weigh  more  than  3  oz.,  showing  clearly 
that  their  size  at  a  certain  age  depends  chiefly  on  the  feeding. 
At  four  years  of  age  they  should  weigh  i  to  i^  Ibs.  ;  at  five  years, 
from  i^  to  2\  Ibs.  ;  at  six  years,  from  2^  to  3^  Ibs.  ;  at  seven 
years,  from  3^  to  5  Ibs.  Only  a  few  of  them  reach  this  size,  and 
they  soon  die  off.  It  is  only  when  the  feeding  is  good  that  a 
weight  of  from  3  to  5  Ibs.  is  attained.  Trout  leave  the  larger 
rivers  and  run  up  the  small  ones  usually  about  the  ist  of  October, 
and  spawn,  as  I  have  said,  about  the  i5th  of  October.  A  little 


FIG.  192. — 2.\  Ibs.     Loch  Leven. 
25th  July  1906. 


Brown   Trout 


191 


frost  makes  them  run  quickly  to  their  spawning-beds.      They  select  a 
place  where  the  gravel  is  fairly  fine  and   is  not   likely  to  shift.      Here 


CJO 

to 


u 

c 


JU 
rt 

5 


t/j 
c 


CS 

Cu 


3 

o 

H 
— 

"rt 


-o 
3 


O 
— 


the    female    digs    a    hole   in    the   gravel    with    her   tail,   striking    four 
or   five   times,   and    making    the   water    dirty.       Every  three   or    four 


192 


Brown   Trout 


minutes   she   turns   on    her   side    with  a   flopping   motion   (Fig.    193), 
and   during  this   time   deposits   the   spawn.       The    male   is  generally 


FIG.  194. — Trout  spawning-bed,  showing  the  gravel  heaped  up. 

beside  her  throughout  the  process  of  spawning,  which  usually  occupies 
from  two  to  four  days,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  water  and  the 


Brown   Trout 


193 


weather.      Too  little  water  sends  her  off,  whilst  severe  frost  does  the 
same  for  a  time. 


The  spawning-bed  made  is  about  18  inches  long,  12  inches  wide, 
and  from  4  to  8  inches  deep,  and  the  gravel  is  heaped  up  in  the  shape 

25 


I94  Brown  Trout 

of  a  mole's  hillock  (Fig.  194).      While  the  female  is  spawning  the  male 
keeps  guard,  and  if  any  intruders  come  up  from  behind,  as  they  usually 


o 
o 


c 
C 

X 

"3 


<u 

rt 


o 

O 

h-1 


do,  he  turns  round  and  rushes  after  them.  Quite  small  trout  are  often 
seen  behind  the  spawning-bed  picking  up  the  spawn  that  remains  un- 
covered by  the  gravel.  Trout  after  spawning  become  kelts  (Fig.  195), 


Brown  Trout 


195 


tr. 


C 
rt 


•J~. 

6 


rt 
X 


196 


Brown   Trout 


and  soon  thereafter  return  to  the  main  stream,  where  they  remain  in  the 
deep  pools  till  March,  when  food  is  more  plentiful.  In  April,  when 
the  flies  begin  to  appear — blue  duns  first,  and  then  March  browns— 
they  begin  to  leave  the  deep  pools  and  come  on  to  the  shallow  streams, 
where  the  flies  are  most  abundant.  At  this  time  they  often  run  up 
rivers  for  a  considerable  distance.  In  large  streams  they  are  generally 
in  the  best  condition  about  the  i5th  of  May,  while  in  the  smaller  streams 
they  are  not  in  good  condition  till  June;  and,  strange  to  say,  in  the 
south  of  England,  on  the  Itchen,  trout  are  not  in  good  condition  until 


>»*.****** 

i  < 


FIG.   198. — 3-lb.  Loch  Crosophuill  Trout,  Sutherland.     June  1900. 

they  have  had  at  least  a  week's  feeding  on.  Mayflies,  which  is  generally 
about  the  first  week  of  June. 

On  nearly  all  the  northern  rivers  there  is  an  abundance  of 
February  reds,  blue  duns,  and  March  browns.  The  March  browns 
are  nearly  as  large  as  Mayflies,  and  the  trout  feeding  on  them  soon 
come  into  perfect  condition.  On  many  of  the  streams  of  the  south  of 
England  no  March  browns  appear.  This  is  owing  to  the  sluggish 
nature  of  the  rivers  and  the  want  of  round  boulders  in  the  bottom,  of 
which  the  larvae  of  the  March  browns  are  extremely  fond.  Their 
thin  flat  bodies  appear  to  be  adapted  for  whirling  round  the  stones, 
which  protect  them  from  their  enemies. 

Flies  bring  trout  into  condition  much  quicker  than  the  food  they 
obtain  on  the  bottom.  A  cold,  backward  season  keeps  back  the 


Brown   Trout 


197 


flies,    thus    preventing    the    trout   from    coming    so   soon    into   condi- 


O 

ON 


U 


a 

o 


tion.      So  much   is   this  the  case,  that  in  a  warm  summer  trout  grow 
twice  as    much    as    they   clo    in    a   cold    one.      The    changes    caused 


198 


Brown  Trout 


by  feeding   have    misled   many   naturalists,    leading   them    to   believe 
there  are  many  different  species  of  trout  in  this  country. 


o 

l_ 


a. 
o 


U 

o 
o 


o 
o 


As  I  have  already  said,  I  have  studied  this  matter  very  carefully, 
and  my  experience  all  goes  to  prove  that  the  changes  are  due  to  feeding. 


Brown   Trout 


199 


I 


<u 

.£ 
"3 


o 

cj 

C/3 


o 

o 


o 

o 


20O 


Brown   Trout 


If  one  wishes   to  have   "  Loch  Leven  trout,"  all   he   has  to  do   is   to 
introduce  some   "burn  trout'    fry  into   Loch   Leven,  when   they  will 


rt 
u 


rt 

3 

In 

H 


-5 

H 


8 


very  soon  have  the  appearance  of  Loch  Leven  trout.      If  half  of  the 
fry  are  allowed  to  remain  and  the   other  half  transferred  to  a  poor 


Brown   Trout 


2OI 


hill-burn,   after  four   years   they  will  become    "burn   trout,"   weighing 
only  2^  oz.,  while  their  brothers  and  sisters  in   Loch  Leven  will,  after 


o 
U 


CJ 

rt 


o 

H 

o 
o 


O 
N 


the  same  length  of  time,  be  30  to  36  oz.  in  weight,  and  this,  I  maintain, 

is  due  to  the  feeding.      The  same  difference  will  be  found   in  a  loch. 

26 


2O2 


Brown  Trout 


C 

<u 


o 


t/J 


" 


0      0) 

t/i  E 


t/J 

rt 


O 

H 


o 

o" 


Brown  Trout 


203 


CO 

o 

ON 


U 

CJ 

G 


U) 

c 
'i 

o 


H 


O 

rt 

<u 


o 
ui 

H 
c 

o 


2O4 


Brown   Trout 


o 
t^ 


<U 

,C 


u 


o 

N 

U 


Brown   Trout 


205 


^> '  ^ ^  x*££*g^^-k^?*. 

W-'.~  ^l*3ji$$iiM 

••    W£;m&Mi?iim 

•  •  -Hi  ^w.i-S^.-^Jr,.;-/A'-vijf':'KVi:iSB138 


o 
>^ 


c 

'iD 

l> 


- 

o 


o 

o 


o 
<s 

•• 


2O6 


Brown   Trout 


CO 

>-, 


c 

k. 

O 

O 

H 

~  o 
a 

C 

K 


O 
O 


O 
N 

O 

£ 


Brown  Trout 


207 


If  one  part  of  the  loch  is  deep  and  another  part  shallow,  the  shallow 
part  will  produce  large  trout  and  the  deep  part  small  trout. 


o 

tfl 


u 

O 


ON 
O 


Loch  Ericht  at  Dalwhinnie  is   16  miles  long,  and  for  12  miles  it 
has  only  shallow  water  for  a  few  yards  from  the  side  ;    the  remainder 


2os  Brown   Trout 

being  hundreds  of  feet  deep.      On  these   12  miles  of  water  the  trout 


o 

H 
o 

fc* 

_rt 
t2 


u 
o 


,0 

Jei 


only  average  about  five  to  the  pound  ;   while  at   the  shallow  part  at 
the   west  end   they  are    nearly  three-quarters  of  a   pound.      When   a 


Brown   Trout 


209 


loch  is  more  than  12  feet  deep  the  supply  of  food  soon  becomes 
scarce  and  the  trout  small,  while  shallow  lochs  produce  plenty  of 
food,  therefore  large  trout. 

The  altitude  of  a  loch,  too,  has  a  good  deal  to  do  with  the  size 
of  the  trout.  Lochs  1000  feet  above  sea-level,  fed  from  snow  from 
surrounding  hills,  produce  very  little  feeding  until  May,  and  owing 


FIG.  2ii.  — 19 J  Ibs.,  Killarney.      April  1907. 

to  the  cold  fall  off  in  September,  thus  giving  the  trout  only  four 
months  of  good  feeding.  On  the  other  hand,  lochs  at  or  near  sea- 
level  produce  good  feeding  in  March,  and  continue  to  do  so  till 
October,  so  that  the  trout  have  seven  months'  good  feeding,  or 
three  months  more  than  their  Highland  brethren.  It  will  be  seen, 
then,  that  this  extra  time  for  feeding,  when  extended  over  the  seven 
or  eight  years  which  constitute  the  life  of  a  trout,  easily  accounts 
for  the  difference  in  size.  But  not  only  is  the  feeding-time  shorter, 

but  the  food  is  much  scarcer.      A  loch  at  sea-level  with  water   5  to  i  2 

27 


21O 


Brown   Trout 


feet  in  depth  can  usually  sustain  about  two  hundred  trout  to  the  acre, 
while  one  of  the  same  depth  at  an  altitude  of  1000  feet  will  only 
produce  food  for  half  that  amount.  The  owners  of  lochs  usually  pay 
far  too  little  attention  to  this  when  stocking  them,  and  in  their  manage- 
ment afterwards. 

Large  sums  of  money  have  been  spent  introducing   Loch  Leven 


FIG.  212.  — 13  Ibs.,  Loch  Kannocli.      251!!  June  1906. 

trout  into  lochs  which  contain  small  trout  that  are  scarcely  worth 
catching,  in  the  belief  that  the  size  of  the  trout  will  be  improved  in 
this  way.  Instead,  however,  of  increasing  the  size,  those  who  do  this 
are  selecting  the  best  possible  means  of  defeating  their  object.  The 
small  size  is  caused  by  there  being  too  many  trout  for  the  quantity 
of  food  in  the  loch.  Reduce  the  number  of  trout  and  the  size  will 
very  soon  increase.  This  can  be  done  by  netting  and  curtailing  the 
spawning-ground,  or  by  fishing  it  well.  It  seems  rather  strange  that 
those  who  have  the  care  of  lochs  give  them  so  little  attention.  One 


Brown   Trout 


21  I 


often   hears   the   complaint  that,   although    such  and  such  a  loch  did 
well    for    the    first    few    years,    it    then    began    to    decline,    and    the 


tp 

rt 

u 


o 

o 


00 


trout    became    so   small    that    they   were    not    worth   catching.      Now 
this    is    caused  by  their   having   too   much   spawning-ground,  and  as 


212 


Brown   Trout 


a  consequence,    the   trout    became    too    plentiful    for   the   quantity  of 
food  available. 


<u 

I* 
<u 

c 


c 

H 


u 
C 


M 

C 


A  good  example  of  this,  although  from  a  different  cause,  is  found 
in  the  case  of  the  famous  lochs  at  Altnacealgach  in  Sutherland. 
Thirty  years  ago  these  contained  trout  six  or  seven  to  the  pound, 


Brown   Trout 


213 


and   at   that    time    were   seldom    fished.       Now   that    they   are    more 
fished  the  trout  average  about  two  or  three  to  the  pound.      Or  you 


8 


V 

c 


c 


01 
.C 


n 

o 

H 

c 
IS 


O 

h-1 


may  hear  another  complaint  that  thirty  years  ago  a  certain  loch  con- 
tained plenty  of  trout,  and   yielded  fine  baskets  of  free  risers,  each 


Brown   Trout 


fish  averaging  i  lb.,  but  now  the  loch  contains  nothing  but  large  trout 


3 

O 


O 

O 
c 

rt 


O 

O 

1-1 


vO 
01 


•[    • 


VO 
O 


cj 
O 

c 
c 

rt 


o 

O 


of  a  sulky  nature.      In   its   early  days  sixty  trout,   weighing  60  Ibs., 
were  often  caught   in  a  day  ;    but  now  it  is  most  difficult  to  capture 


Brown   Trout 


215 


more  than  three  trout  in  a  clay  weighing  6  Ibs.      The  reason  of  this 
is  not  too  much  spawning-ground,  but  want  of  it  ;  and  if  two  hundred 


o 


(J 

o 
e 
c 


o 
o 


00 


yearlings  are  put  in   to  the  acre,  the  "  fine  baskets  "  of  the  old  clays 
will  come  back  again. 


2l6 


Brown  Trout 


When  a  farmer  rents  a  piece  of  land  for  grazing  he  knows  how 
many  sheep  or  cattle  it  will  pasture,  and  that  if  he  put  on  more  than 
the  proper  number  they  will  not  grow.  He  also  knows  that  if  he 
introduce  too  few  they  will  become  fat  and  too  lazy  to  eat  up  all 
the  pasture,  and  he  will  thus  lose  part  of  the  money  paid  for  the 
pastureland.  If  the  proprietor  or  the  tenant  of  a  loch  would  consider 
the  matter  in  the  same  way  as  the  farmer,  he  would  obtain  full  value 
out  of  his  lochs,  be  saved  a  deal  of  grumbling,  and  find  life  more 
pleasant. 

For   years   I   have   had    the    management  of  several    lochs,  and 


FlG.  219. —  i6-lb.  Loch  Rannoch  Trout.      May  1903. 

when  the  trout  grow  too  large  and  do  not  rise  I  introduce  more  trout, 
and  soon  the  large  ones  begin  to  rise  more  freely.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  trout  are  too  small,  I  net  them  or  deprive  them  of  part 
of  the  spawning-ground.  In  constructing  new  lochs  one  should 
endeavour  to  have  as  much  shallow  water  as  possible,  but  not  shallow 
enough  to  allow  weeds  to  grow  in  it.  The  best  depth  is  from  5  to 
9  feet ;  beyond  1 2  feet  food  becomes  scarce,  and  trout  do  not  rise 
well  in  deep  water.  Attention  to  those  matters  will  ensure  the 
success  of  a  loch  and  save  much  unnecessary  expense. 

The  nature  of  the  feeding  has  such  an  effect  on  the  appearance  of 
trout  that  no  two  lochs  or  streams  in  Great  Britain  contain  trout  which 
are  exactly  similar.  My  experience  of  hundreds  of  lochs  and  rivers 


Brown   Trout 


217 


causes    me   to   differ  from    those   naturalists  who   say  that   there   are 


many  species  instead  of  only  varieties  of  trout.     Although  Loch  Leven 

trout  are  supposed  to  be  a  distinct  species,  I  maintain  that  given  a  loch 

28 


218 


Brown  Trout 


producing  the  same  or  practically  the  same  feeding  as  that  found  in  Loch 
Leven  little  or  no  difference  in  the  trout  could  be  detected.     The  trout 


o 

H 
^  r^ 
13 
'o 


of  Loch  Slattell  at  Forsinard  in  Sutherland  (Figs.  196,  197)  are  as  nearly 
alike  to  those  of  Loch  Leven  as  any  I  have  seen.      By  comparing  the 


Brown   Trout 


219 


photographs  of  the  former  with  those  of  Loch  Leven  it  will  be  seen  that 
they  are  almost  identical.  The  rich  feeding  in  Loch  Leven  produces 
spots  on  their  sides.  Loch  Crosophuill  in  Sutherland  contains  rather 


O 

V 


'J 

O 


better  trout  than  Loch  Leven,  because  the  feeding  is  somewhat  richer 
(Figs.  198,  199,  200)  ;  while  Loch  Durness,  close  to  Loch  Crosophuill, 
contains  even  richer  trout,  so  rich  that  the  spots  on  the  sides  become 


22O 


Brown  Trout 


joined  together.     A  photograph  is  shown  (Fig.  183)  of  a  trout  weigh- 
ing 9  Ibs.  which  was  caught  in  this  loch  ;  this  should  be  compared  with 


o 

3 


o 

o 


those  of  the  Loch  Leven  trout.      The  other  varieties  of  trout  which 
are  not  so  well  fed  should  also  be  compared  with  these. 


Brown   Trout 


221 


Loch  Gorm  trout  (Fig.  201),  for  instance,  nearly  all  have  round 
black  spots  on  their  sides,  and  look  almost  like  a  different  species. 
But  these  spots,  as  before,  are  the  result  of  the  special  feeding  in 
this  loch.  The  feeding  has  also  a  great  deal  to  do  with  the  shape. 
The  richer  the  feeding  the  smaller  are  the  heads  and  the  plumper 
the  bodies.  Then  the  nature  of  the  soil  and  the  colour  of  the  water 
have  much  to  do  with  the  colour  of  a  trout.  Clear  water  and  a 
light-coloured  bottom  produce  silvery-coloured  trout,  while  peat- 


Photo  l<y  Harry  Anderson. 

FIG.  224. — 8-lb.  Loch  Veyatie  Trout.     June  1906. 

coloured  water  produce  dark-coloured  trout.  Young  trout  before  they 
spawn  are  brighter  in  colour  than  older  trout.  Trout,  however,  which 
live  in  tidal  water  which  is  brackish  are  nevertheless  silvery  like  sea- 
trout,  and  present  a  strong  contrast  to  Loch  Leven  trout.  A  photo- 
graph of  a  trout  from  the  tidal  waters  of  the  Tay  is  shown  in  Fig.  202. 
The  trout  in  Loch  Harry  in  the  Orkney  Islands  also  frequent  brackish 
water,  and  it  is  difficult  to  tell  from  their  appearance  whether  they  are 
sea-trout  or  brown  trout. 

Many  trout  become  migratory  because  the  streams  frequented  by 
them  are  not  large  enough  to  afford  sufficient  protection,  hence  on 
attaining  a  certain  size  they  fall  back  into  the  sea.  They  must  either 


222 


Brown  Trout 


go  into  brackish  water  or  into  the  sea.      They  thus  become  migratory, 
and  may  be  seen  in  the  streams  during  the  spawning  season  in  large 


41 

Q 


numbers,  many  of  them  being  5  or  6  Ibs.  in  weight.     When  they  have 
spawned  they  return  again  to  the  sea. 


Brown   Trout  223 

In   Loch   Stenness,   the  chief  of  the  Orkney  lochs,  the  water   is 

*/*3.  '    r'  vv<f  i*i^H/2*«>?5»n^V*Vv  "*  '- 

SilS   i  /  M^a* 

^Wtf  ntf$g*-ft 


vo 

o 

ON 


o 
H 

_OJ 

rt 
i~, 

4) 


-.1  .    ;v?'    w 

/      •        -i  ,    -   •/ 

--  .  : 


always  brackish,  and  contains  many  brown  trout,  which,  owing  to  the 
splendid   feeding  ground,   run   to   a   large   size.      The   finest    I    have 


224 


Brown   Trout 


seen,  and,  I  believe,  the  largest  ever  caught  in  this  country,  was  sent 


o 
H 


o 
o 


o 
o 

h-1 


to  me  to  be  set  up,   and   three  days   after  capture  weighed    29    Ibs. 
I    have   noticed   many  trout   from    10  to   20   Ibs.    in   weight   rising   in 


Brown   Trout 


225 


Loch    Stenness,   but    these    large    ones    are    very  difficult    to    catch. 
Having  an  opportunity  of  feeding  all  the  year,  they  are  always  in  good 


condition,  and  even  the  kelts  are  handsome  fish.      Loch   Harry,  which 
adjoins   Loch   Stenness,   is  also  affected  by  high  tides,   and  becomes 

occasionally  brackish.      So  suddenly  does  the  salt  water  come  on  that 

29 


226  Brown   Trout 

the  trout  become  sick  and  run  up  the  streams.  In  July  and  August 
many  of  the  smaller  trout  leave  Stenness,  run  up  into  Loch  Harry, 
and  in  both  lochs  are  in  good  condition  early  in  March. 

The  Gillaroo  trout  found  in  Ireland  and  in  Scotland  are  con- 
sidered a  distinct  species.  But  this  is  difficult  to  understand,  as  I 
have  caught  many  of  them  and,  although  their  shape  and  markings 
are  different  from  those  of  most  of  the  loch  trout  we  see,  the  difference 
is  all  caused  by  the  food  in  the  particular  loch  in  which  they  are  found. 
If  they  were  all  cleared  out  and  ordinary  trout  introduced,  these  latter 
would  become  "  Gillaroo  "  trout  in  a  very  short  time.  See  photograph 
of  one  from  Loch  Mulach-Corrie,  Sutherland  (Fig.  203). 

THE  SALMO  FEROX 

Many  maintain  that  this  is  also  a  distinct  species.  I  have 
caught  many  of  these  fish  in  the  lochs  in  Scotland,  and  have  had 
hundreds  through  my  hands  for  preservation,  therefore  I  have  no 
hesitation  in  stating  that  a  ferox  is  only  a  trout  Salmo  fario.  Its 
great  size  is  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  it  has  become  a  cannibal 
and  lives  almost  entirely  on  its  own  species.  I  have  made  a  point  of 
examining  most  of  those  I  got  in,  nearly  all  of  which  contained  from 
one  to  three  trout  and  nothing  else.  Where  there  are  plenty  of  trout 
to  feed  upon  they  grow  so  quickly  that  they  may  be  15  to  20  Ibs.  in 
weight  in  seven  or  eight  years. 

In  describing  the  scales  of  trout  I  will  try  to  prove  their  age. 
Trout  of  many  shapes  and  colours  are  found  in  Loch  Ericht,  and 
when  in  good  condition  are  shaped  like  a  small  salmon.  In  Loch 
Rannoch  they  are  thickly  spotted  and  yellow  in  colour.  In  Loch 
Awe  some  are  silvery  like  a  salmon  ;  some  have  short  heads,  others 
long  heads  and  large  teeth,  while  no  two  of  them  are  alike.  For  their 
size  they  weigh  much  more  than  salmon  and  far  surpass  them  in 
strength.  When  hooked  they  fight  to  the  last,  often  escaping  after 
they  are  in  the  net  or  on  the  gaff.  See  photographs  of  them  from 
various  lochs.  They  are  usually  caught  by  trolling  with  artificial 


Brown   Trout 


227 


minnow,  but  the  most  successful  bait  is  a  small  trout.  It  is  best  to 
have  one  rod  mounted  with  a  phantom  and  another  with  a  small  trout 
trolled  between  the  deep  and  the  shallow  water.  I  have  found  that 
they  take  best  on  a  dull  and  fairly  rough  day.  They  are  now  so  much 
sought  after,  however,  that  a  good  deal  of  patience  is  required  to 
catch  one,  and  blank  days  are  the  rule. 

Many  of  the  lakes  in  Ireland  contain  large  ferox.  A  photograph 
of  one  I  got  in  this  season  is  shown  (Fig.  210).  It  weighed  19^  Ibs., 
and  was  a  real  beauty.  The  flesh  of  these  large  trout  is  usually 
well  coloured  and  almost  like  that  of  the  salmon,  but  not  so  good  for 
the  table,  as  it  is  coarse,  almost  like  that  of  a  bull-trout. 


LOCH   LEVEN  TROUT 

MUCH  has  been  said  and  written  about  the  Loch  Leven  trout,  the 
general  belief  being  that  it  is  a  distinct  species.  Again,  it  is  main- 
tained that  it  is  a  landlocked  sea-trout,  but  I  fail  to  see  how  this  can 
be,  because  a  sea-trout  could  not  become  landlocked  so  long  as  there 
was  an  outlet  of  over  30  feet  wide  through  which  it  could  escape.  Fish 
have  always  had  free  access  to  the  sea  from  Loch  Leven,  so  that  they 
are  no  more  landlocked  than  those  in  Loch  Tay.  The  reason,  no 
doubt,  for  stating  this  is,  that  in  1830  the  loch  was  reduced  to  about 
three-fourths  of  its  original  area,  but  it  seems  to  be  forgotten  that  this 
made  no  difference  in  the  quantity  of  water  flowing  out  of  the  loch. 
Of  course,  had  the  fish  been  prevented  by  hecks  from  going  down 
there  might  have  been  some  reason  for  this  assertion. 

I  have  had  ample  opportunity  of  studying  Loch  Leven  trout,  and 
nothing  I  have  noticed  about  them  has.  caused  me  to  think  they  are 
different  from  any  other  trout.  Loch  Leven  trout  are  admitted 
by  all  to  be  the  finest  trout  in  Great  Britain,  if  not  in  the  world, 
and  nowhere  can  they  be  seen  to  such  perfection  as  in  Loch  Leven. 
Loch  Leven  is  almost  round,  and  covers  an  area  of  3400  acres, 
in  which  are  several  islands,  the  largest  being  St.  Serf's,  occupying 
about  So  acres.  According  to  Sir  John  Murray  and  Mr.  Pullar's 
survey,  it  is  350  feet  above  sea-level.  "  The  area  of  the  bottom 
between  the  shore  and  the  lo-feet  contour  line  is  about  1430  acres,  or 
forty-two  per  cent  of  the  whole  area  of  the  loch  ;  that  between 
50  and  70  feet  is  nearly  1 10  acres."  No  less  than  eighty-five  per  cent 
of  the  bottom  is  covered  by  less  than  20  feet  of  water. 

This  large  extent  of  shallow  water  is  the   means  of  producing  a 

228 


Loch   Leven   Trout 


229 


large  amount  of  food.      The  loch   is  supplied  with  water  by  four  large 


o 

ON 


u 

"ca 


ON 
CM 
N 


streams,  the   principal   ones   being   the   North   Oueich,   the   Gairney, 
the   South   Queich,  and   the    Pow.      Each   is   about   2   miles  from  the 


230 


Loch   Leven  Trout 


other,   and   the   outlet    being   at    the    east    end,   all    help  to    keep   the 
loch  fresh  and  healthy.     The   North   Oueich   and  the   South   Queich 


O 

ON 


It 

I-J 


f 

rt 

O 


O 


enter  on   the   west   side,   the  Gairney  on   the    south,   while    the    Pow 
enters  on  the  north. 


Loch   Leven  Trout  231 

Besides  these  four  principal  streams,  many  other  smaller  streams 
and  springs  contribute  their  share,  and  the  whole  uniting  in  one  body 
become  the  source  of  the  river  Leven.  For  several  miles  from  the 
outlet  the  river  contains  trout  as  large  as  there  are  in  Loch  Leven 
itself;  but  below  this  the  river  is  so  much  polluted  with  poison  that 
even  the  eel  fry  are  killed.  The  chief  food  of  the  trout  is  the  larvae 
and  flies  of  the  blood-worm,  which  begin  to  appear  early  in  April,  and 
are  usually  most  numerous  about  the  2Oth  of  that  month.  They  first 
make  their  appearance  within  2  miles  of  the  outlet — from  Duncan's 
corner  to  the  sluices  ;  and  also  in  that  part  of  the  loch  between  the 
sluices  and  the  "  Narrow  Neck,"  including  the  "  Hole  of  the  Inch." 

The  larva  of  the  blood-worm,  which  lives  in  the  mud,  is  about  an 
inch  long,  blood-red  in  colour,  and  about  the  thickness  of  a  stocking 
needle.  In  April  the  perfect  insect  often  retains  the  blood  colour 
of  the  larva.  There  are  several  varieties,  but  this  is  the  principal 
one.  Hundreds  of  Loch  Leven  trout  which  I  have  opened  from 
April  to  September  contained  both  larvae  and  flies  of  the  blood- 
worm. The  larvae  of  this  fly  have  the  power  of  rising  to  the  surface 
and  falling  to  the  bottom  again,  and  while  in  this  state  trout 
devour  large  numbers  of  them.  In  my  opinion,  the  most  important 
food  of  the  trout  in  Great  Britain,  though  little  known  to  anglers,  is 
the  fly  and  larva  of  the  blood-worm.  One  can  have  little  idea  of  the 
immense  swarms  which  appear  on  Loch  Leven  unless  they  have 
personally  witnessed  this  wonderful  sight.  As  the  season  advances 
more  appear  in  the  evening  than  during  the  day,  and  on  warm  nights 
the  surface  of  the  water  is  almost  covered  with  them,  and  it  is  then 
the  trout  are  to  be  seen  "  boiling  "  all  over  the  loch. 

Next  in  importance  is  the  olive  dun,  both  the  fly  and  larva  ot 
which  are  greatly  sought  after  by  the  trout.  1 1  is  one  of  the  Ephemerae, 
and  usually  makes  its  appearance  about  the  beginning  of  May,  and  con- 
tinues till  the  middle  of  October.  There  is  both  a  large  and  a  small 
kind.  Besides  the  trout,  gulls,  terns,  and  swallows  feed  largely  upon 
them.  The  trout  also  obtain  part  of  their  food-supply  from  stone-flies, 
caddis-flies,  and  their  larvae,  also  a  small  fly,  Cain,  one  of  the  smaller 


232 


Loch   Leven   Trout 


UJ 
a 
O 


Ephemerae.     At  certain  seasons,  too,  they  feed  on  shellfish,  which  are 

very  plentiful  over  the  whole 
of  the  loch,  and  in  August 
they  feed  much  on  perch 
fry,  which  then  appear  in 
the  loch. 

About  the  middle  of 
September  trout  that  are 
to  spawn  begin  to  take  less 
food,  while  the  younger  fish 
that  are  not  to  spawn  feed 
on  until  the  cold  weather 
comes,  when  they  also  begin 
to  leave  off  feeding. 

Loch  Leven  being  at  an 
altitude  of  350  feet  above 
sea-level,  is  pretty  cold,  and 
in  some  cold  seasons  the 
trout  are  not  in  good  con- 
dition till  the  middle  of 
May.  June,  however,  is  the 
month  in  which  insect  life 
is  most  prolific,  and  as  a 
consequence  the  trout  are 
then  in  perfect  condition. 
Had  Loch  Leven  been 
nearer  sea-level,  the  trout 
would  have  grown  to  a 
larger  size.  Their  limit  of 
size  may  be  said  to  be  about 
3  Ibs.,  although  frequently 
trout  from  3*,  Ibs.  to  5  Ibs. 

are  captured.      The  record  for  Loch  Leven  stands  at  10  Ibs.  ;  and  on 
8th  September  1911  Col.   Scott,  Callander,  captured  with  fly  a  beauty 


t/J 
C 

°o 

t/3 


1) 
> 

CL> 


O 


Loch    Leven   Trout  233 

of  9  Ibs.  13  oz.  Such  monsters  are,  however,  rare,  the  great  majority 
dying  on  reaching  3  Ibs.,  when  they  will  be  from  seven  to  eight 
years  old.  A  large  proportion  ol  those  on  growing  to  3  Ibs.  fall  off  in 


- 


_. 

D    — 


condition,  decrease  in  weight,  and  ultimately  die  when  reduced  to  three- 
quarters  of  a  pound.  An  illustration  of  one  is  shown  (Fig.  231),  but 
many  of  them  are  reduced  even  more  than  this  one.  If  Loch  Leven 
trout  have  better  feeding  and  a  longer  time  to  feed  each  year  than 


234 


Loch   Leven   Trout 


they  have  in  their  native  loch,  they  grow  to  a  much  larger  size. 
When  they  have  been  transferred  to  New  Zealand,  for  example, 
many  have  reached  20  Ibs.  and  over. 


1) 
G 


C 
<U 
> 
0) 


o 


in 
H« 

<u 
"rt 

£ 


o 
H 

c 


u 

o 


Those  wishing  to  stock  their  rivers  would  do  well  to  see  that 
they  are  supplied  with  genuine  Loch  Leven  trout,  for  many  of  the 
trout  from  hatchery  establishments  have  short  gills  and  deformed  fins, 


Loch   Leven   Trout 


235 


and  are  therefore  not  fit  to  stock  any  water.  Such  trout  do  not  feed 
well  and  remain  dwarfed.  The  better  able  a  trout  is  to  swim  quickly 
through  the  water,  the  more  food  it  will  be  able  to  catch. 

In  April,  when  feeding  on  flies,  Loch  Leven  trout  travel  through 
the  water  at  the  rate  of  about  2  miles  an  hour,  their  speed  gradually 
increasing  till  July,  when  it  reaches  about  3  miles  an  hour.  They 
travel  from  6  to  18  inches  under  the  surface,  sucking  clown  one 
fly  after  another,  and  usually  heading  upwind.  Their  habits,  however, 
are  different  in  a  stream.  They  usually  choose  a  certain  spot  and 
remain  there,  often  rising  for  weeks  at  the  flies  floating  down.  This 
is  why  dry-fly  fishing  is  practised  on  streams.  The  angler  sees  a  fish 
rise,  and  casts  his  fly  almost  over  the  ring  it  made  ;  did  he  do  this 
on  a  loch  the  trout  would  be  yards  away  by  the  time  his  fly  alighted, 
and  would  not  see  it. 

During  cold  weather  the  trout  leave  the  shallows  and  go 
into  deep  water,  where  they  remain  during  winter.  When  spring 
comes  they  begin  again  to  seek  shallower  water,  where  food  is  more 
plentiful.  Trout  in  Loch  Leven  2^  years  old  usually  weigh  about 
8  oz.  ;  3^  years,  i  Ib.  ;  4^  years,  i^  to  2  Ibs.  ;  5^  years,  2  to  3  Ibs.  ; 
5  to  7  years,  2^  to  5  Ibs.  (Fig.  232).  After  this,  as  has  already  been 
said,  most  of  them  die.  The  condition  of  the  trout  depends  much  on 
the  weather  in  April  and  May,  and  if  seasonable  at  all  are  soon 
in  good  condition  ;  again  in  a  cold  spring  I  have  seen  them  in 
better  condition  in  the  middle  of  April  than  they  sometimes  are  in  the 
middle  of  May.  These  two  months,  however,  have  generally  more 
effect  than  other  months  in  bringing  trout  into  condition,  both  in  Loch 
Leven  and  other  lochs  as  well.  In  Loch  Leven  the  young  trout 
which  have  not  spawned  are  usually  about  ^  Ib.  in  weight  during 
the  winter,  and  are  in  much  better  condition  than  those  that  have 
spawned  and  become  kelts  (Fig.  233),  consequently  it  is  usually 
the  smaller  trout  that  come  first  into  condition.  The  trout  that 
spawn  early  come  into  good  condition  much  quicker  than  those  that 
spawn  late,  so  that  there  are  trout  constantly  coming  into  good 
condition  from  April  to  the  end  of  August.  The  largest  ones  are 


236  Loch   Leven   Trout 

usually  the  last  to  be  in  good  condition.  After  the  end  of  August 
they  begin  to  become  lean  and  to  lose  colour  again.  When  in  best 
condition  a  Loch  Leven  trout  is  generally  as  well  coloured  as  a 
salmon,  and  is  as  highly  prized  for  the  table.  Even  the  pike,  perch, 
and  eels  in  Loch  Leven  surpass  all  others  that  I  have  seen,  thus 
testifying  also  to  the  richness  of  the  feeding.  Many  years  ago  the 
loch  was  said  to  contain  large  char,  but  these  are  now  extinct. 
Besides  trout  and  other  fish,  the  loch  also  supplies  food  for  thousands 
of  duck.  There  are  tufted  ducks  by  the  thousand,  and  large  numbers 
of  black-headed  gulls.  The  latter,  along  with  numerous  swallows 
which  appear  early  in  April,  live  principally  on  the  flies  that  are  bred 
in  the  loch. 

Loch  Leven  trout  begin  to  spawn  in  October,  but  it  is  not  till 
about  the  middle  of  November  that  they  do  so  in  large  numbers. 
The  North  Queich  is  the  earliest  river,  and  the  Pow  the  latest.  In 
the  North  Oueich  the  trout  run  a  month  earlier  than  those  in  the  other 

f^*S 

streams.  Trout  remain  for  some  time  in  the  larger  streams  before 
they  are  ready  to  spawn.  In  the  smaller  streams,  on  the  other  hand, 
they  often  begin  spawning  the  day  they  enter  them,  and  return  to 
the  loch  again  as  soon  as  they  have  done  so.  The  male  trout  run 
up  first. 

The  operation  of  spawning  can  easily  be  observed  on  the  smaller 
streams.  A  trout  of  2  Ibs.  weight  makes  a  bed  10  to  15  inches  long, 
and  from  6  to  1 2  inches  deep.  The  female,  as  a  rule,  takes  two 
days  to  complete  the  process,  and  then  falls  back  into  the  loch  again, 
while  the  males  remain  for  several  weeks.  After  the  fry  are  hatched 
they  remain  in  the  streams  from  nine  months  to  two  years  before 
entering  the  loch.  Those  in  the  streams  have  red  spots,  but  after 
they  have  been  a  short  time  in  the  loch  the  red  spots  disappear.  This 
is  peculiar  to  Loch  Leven.  They  then  become  quite  silvery,  and 
retain  their  silvery  coat  until  the  spawning  season  arrives.  As  they 
grow  older  there  is  more  yellow  in  their  colour. 

At  one  time  Loch  Leven  was  netted  and  the  fish  sent  to  market,, 
where  they  produced  a  high  price,  and  no  doubt  they  would  sell  at  a. 


Loch   Leven   Trout 


237 


much  higher  rate  now.      For  the  last  thirty-five  years,  however,  the 
loch  has  been    reserved    for   angling,  and    during   that   time  has  had 


FIG.  234.  —  Basket  of  Loch  Leven  Trout.      Loch  Leven,  June  1906. 

many  ups  and  clowns,  success  or  failure  depending  on  the  number  oi 
pike  in  the  loch.      When  these  were  plentiful  they  soon  reduced  the 


238  Loch   Leven  Trout 

number  of  trout,  but  now  fortunately  these  "pests"  have  been 
destroyed,  and  during  this  year — 1908 — the  number  of  trout  caught 
has  far  exceeded  the  catch  of  any  previous  year,  for  over  34,000 
trout  were  caught  with  the  rod,  and  with  attention  and  care  this 
famous  loch  is  capable  of  yielding  even  a  much  larger  annual 
catch  than  this.  When  we  consider  the  large  extent  of  the  loch- 
3400  acres — we  hardly  think  that  it  is  too  much  to  expect  an  average 
of  only  a  little  more  than  nine  trout  to  the  acre,  especially  when 
we  have  known  a  loch  to  produce  fifty  trout  to  the  acre. 


THE   GRAYLING 

THE  Grayling  is  not  so  plentiful  in  Scotland  as  it  is  in  England.  It 
is  found  in  a  few  of  the  Border  streams,  and  in  the  rivers  Clyde  and 
Tweed  grayling  are  very  numerous.  The  farthest  north  river  in  which 
it  has  established  itself  is  the  Isla  in  Perthshire.  This  river  swarms 
with  them,  and  they  are  the  finest  grayling  I  have  seen,  the  average 
weight  of  those  I  have  caught  here  being  over  a  pound.  Many  of 
them,  however,  are  from  i  to  3  Ibs.,  and  sometimes  over.  So  plentiful 
are  they  that  when  fishing  for  pike  on  one  occasion  our  men  brought 
ashore  twelve  dozen  in  one  haul  of  the  net.  No  doubt,  in  the  course 
of  time,  this  will  be  one  of  the  most  famous  places  for  grayling  in 
Great  Britain.  The  river  is  a  very  large  one,  and  is  in  many  places 
from  60  to  90  yards  wide.  It  is  deep,  flows  smoothly,  and  has  a 
mud  bottom  and  plenty  of  food  which  suits  their  taste.  These 
grayling  were  introduced  at  Kenmore  about  thirty  years  ago  by 
Lord  Breadalbane.  The  Tay  being  too  rapid  a  river,  no  doubt  led 
them  to  seek  more  suitable  quarters,  and  some  had  found  their  way 
into  the  quiet  waters  of  the  Isla,  where  they  are  now  fairly  established. 
Grayling  spawn  about  April,  and  are  not  worth  catching  until  August 
or  September,  although  October  and  November  are  the  best  months. 
Their  flesh  is  white,  and  when  in  good  condition  is  quite  good  for  the 
table.  They  rise  freely  to  fly,  but  are  more  difficult  to  catch  when  in 
good  condition.  A  small  dry  fly  is  usually  the  most  successful  lure,  and 
in  cold,  frosty  weather  a  small  red  worm  does  well.  Although  one  may 
sometimes  get  "  here  and  there  a  lusty  trout,  and  here  and  there  a  gray- 
ling," where  grayling  increase  in  numbers  trout  diminish  accordingly. 

239 


240 


The   Grayling 


oo 
o 


(U 

O 

_o 
tj 

O 


With    its    large    dorsal    fin    standing   out    prominently  from    the 
centre   of   its   back   the   grayling    can    be    easily   recognised   from   all 

other  fish.  The  mouth 
is  very  small  and  speci- 
ally suited  for  sucking  up 
worms,  caddis  larvae,  and 
the  larvae  of  Ephemerae, 
upon  which  the  grayling 
feeds.  When  in  the  pink 
of  condition,  which  is 
usually  about  the  middle 
of  October,  it  is  a  very 
beautiful  fish.  Below  the 
lateral  line  the  sides  and 
belly  are  quite  silvery, 
while  above  this  it  be- 
comes a  golden  olive, 
merging  into  a  dark  slate 
colour  on  the  back.  The 
head  is  also  of  a  dark 
slate  colour,  while  an 
occasional  one  is  to  be 
met  with  having  a  few 
dark  spots  near  the  gill- 
cover.  Specimens  I  have 
had  from  the  Itchen  in 
Hampshire  were  more 
spotted  and  very  much 
coarser  than  our  Isla  gray- 
ling. As  the  spawning 
season  arrives  much  of 
the  silvery  appearance  is 

lost,  and  they  become  of  a  darker  colour  all  over.    Grayling,  like  salmon, 
are  very  subject  to  disease,  which  carries  them  off  in  large  numbers. 


s 

o 


ri 

O 


M 

O 


The  Grayling 


241 


rn 
M 


THE   CHAR 

FROM  the  angler's  point  of  view  char  are  inferior  to  trout. 
They  are  fairly  well  distributed  over  Scotland,  England,  and  Ireland, 
and  are  only  found  in  lochs  or  lakes,  except  in  the  spawning  season, 
when  they  run  up  rivers  to  spawn.  They  are  much  more  local  in  their 
habits  than  trout,  swimming  mostly  in  shoals,  and  usually  frequenting 
the  quietest  bays  in  the  larger  lochs,  while  in  smaller  lochs  they 
roam  over  that  portion  where  food  is  most  abundant.  They  often 
grow  to  12  oz.  or  i  lb.,  but  the  great  majority  average  about 
four  to  the  pound.  The  largest  I  have  seen  was  caught  in  Loch 
Ericht,  and  weighed  2\  Ibs.,  although  as  a  rule  in  this  loch  they  are 
seldom  got  over  a  quarter  of  a  pound.  This  large  one,  however,  may 
have  been  a  different  species,  as  it  was  much  lighter  in  colour  than 
the  ordinary  ones. 

While  fishing  for  trout  in  the  Gaick  Lochs  near  Kingussie  I 
caught  many  weighing  from  a  half  to  three-quarters  of  a  pound.  In 
Loch  Tay  they  run  about  three  to  the  pound.  In  the  lochs  at 
Altnacealgach  there  are  many  small  char,  while  in  the  Baden  Lochs  in 
Sutherland  they  also  run  small.  At  Scourie,  on  the  west  coast  of  Suther- 
land, again,  some  of  the  lochs  contain  large  char.  Some  I  caught  here 
and  sent  to  the  British  Museum  were  new  to  natural  history,  and  have 
been  named  after  the  donor.  In  appearance  they  are  somewhat  like 
sea-trout,  being  silvery  and  having  very  little  red  on  them.  The 
heads  are  small  and  the  bodies  thick.  A  description  of  them  is  given 
below  by  Mr.  Tait  Regan  of  the  British  Museum,  who  is  at  present 

working  at  the  British  char  with  considerable  success. 

242 


The   Char 


243 


SALVELINUS  MALLOCHI 
Depth  of  body,  4!  in  the  length  ;  length  of  head,  4!  to  4!  (<?)  or 


.C 
3 


c 
<u 
•a 

rt 


o 


o 
a 


o 


o 

l_l 

H 


u 

O 


4f  to  4*  (  9  ) ;  snout  obtuse,  longer  than  the  eye,  the  diameter  of  which 
is  5|-  to  6  in  the  length  of  head.  Interorbital  region  convex,  its  width 
3  to  3?  in  the  length  of  head.  Dentition  moderate,  lower  jaw  a  little 


244 


The   Char 


u 
•J-. 


shorter  than    the    upper ;    maxillary    extending    nearly    to    below  the 

posterior  margin  of  eye  or  a 
little  beyond,  its  length  2?  to 
2§  in  the  length  of  head  ;  lower 
jaw  obtusely  pointed  anteriorly, 
its  length  f  to  f  of  the  length 
of  head  ;  9  to  1 1  branchioste- 
gals,  13  or  14  rather  slender 
gill-rakers  on  the  lower  part  of 
anterior  arch,  188  to  200  scales 
in  a  longitudinal  series  ;  dorsal 
with  10  branched  rays,  its 
origin  nearer  to  the  top  of  the 
snout  than  the  base  of  caudal, 
the  longest  ray  J-  to  f  the 
length  of  head,  extending  |- 
to  §  (£)  or  a  little  less  than 
J-  ( ? )  of  the  distance  from  its 
base  to  the  base  of  pelvis ; 
heart  depth  to  caudal  peduncle 
if  to  2  in  its  length  and  ^  to 
|  the  length  of  head  ;  slate- 
coloured  above,  whitish  tinged 
with  orange  below,  numerous 
pale  spots  covering  the  back 
as  well  as  the  sides.  Habitat, 
Scourie,  Sutherlandshire  (see 
Fig.  238). 

The  best  time  to  fish  for 
char  is  on  quiet  evenings, 
when  they  can  sometimes  be 

j 

seen  rising  to  small  flies.     The 
angler's  flies  should  be  allowed 
to  sink  and  then   drawn   quietly  along.      They  readily  take  a   small 


The  Char  245 

white  or  Silver   Devon.      The  common  char    is  very  beautiful   when 


H 


in  good  condition,  being  of  a  bluish-purple  colour  on  the  back,  while 
its  sides  are  of  a  golden  tinge  running  into  red  on  the  belly.      There 


246  The   Char 

are  red,  white,  and  black  spots  along  the  sides  as  well  as  on  the  tail 
and  dorsal  fin.  The  fins  are  reddish  pink,  and  the  outer  edge  is 
tipped  with  white.  Altogether  it  is  a  very  beautiful  fish.  Little  use 
is  made  of  them  in  Scotland,  although  they  are  excellent  for  the  table. 
At  Windermere  they  are  caught  in  nets,  and  when  preserved  are 
sold  at  a  higher  price  under  the  name  of  "  Potted  Char."  If,  how- 
ever, all  these  pots  were  examined  carefully,  many  of  them  would  be 
found  to  contain  small  trout  instead  of  char. 

At  one  time  Loch  Leven  contained  char  of  a  large  size,  many  of 
them  weighing  2  to  3  Ibs.,  but  they  are  no  longer  found  there.  No 
doubt  the  lowering  of  the  loch  accounts  for  this,  as  they  would  be 
pushed  on  to  the  shallows  during  a  storm  and  the  wind  would  drive 
them  ashore  as  it  does  the  perch.  After  a  storm  I  have  seen  the  shore 
strewn  for  miles  with  perch.  Char  run  up  the  rivers  to  spawn  in 
October,  and  the  process  of  spawning  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  trout. 

Another  char,  Salmo  fontinalis,  or  American  char,  has  been 
introduced  into  this  country  during  the  last  thirty  years,  but  up  to  the 
present  time  I  do  not  know  of  any  place  where  they  have  established 
themselves.  They  seem  to  do  so  for  a  time  in  lochs,  but  usually 
soon  disappear.  They  are  very  handsome  fish,  and  closely  resemble 
our  own  char. 


THE    PIKE 

(Esox  lucius] 

THE  pike  is  distributed  over  Great  Britain  and  Ireland.  Many  of  the 
lochs  and  rivers  in  Scotland  contain  tine  pike,  but  they  are  seldom 
fished  for.  In  England  and  Ireland,  however,  they  are  much  more 
sought  after.  The  smaller  ones  weighing  from  2  to  3  Ibs.  are  called 
Jack.  The  spawning  time  comes  on  in  March,  at  which  time  they 
approach  the  shore  and  attach  the  spawn  to  reeds  and  branches  of 
trees,  where  it  remains  until  hatched. 

By  the  end  of  August,  if  the  feeding  is  good,  they  are  half  a 
pound  in  weight,  and  in  another  year  weigh  about  2  Ibs.  After  this, 
if  they  can  procure  plenty  of  food,  a  rapid  increase  in  weight  soon 
takes  place.  Their  principal  food  consists  of  living  fish  that  frequent 
loch  or  stream  ;  nothing  comes  amiss,  not  even  members  of  their 
own  species.  Where  trout  and  the  young  of  the  salmon  can  be 
got  they  prefer  them  to  any  others.  They  will  even  swallow  frogs, 
ducks,  waterhens,  rats,  or  any  other  living  thing  that  appears  on 
the  water. 

I  have  had  occasion  to  net  pike  on  the  river  Tay  and  its  tributaries, 
for  the  purpose  of  reducing  their  number,  and  on  many  occasions  I 
have  found  them  stuffed  full  of  smolts  and  parr.  The  destruction 
thus  caused  must  be  very  great,  and  when  allowed  to  increase 
in  a  stream  or  loch  trout  very  soon  disappear.  In  streams  they 
take  up  their  abode  in  quiet  corners,  and  remain  perfectly  still, 
watching  for  a  trout  to  come  within  reach.  When  it  does  so  they 

dart   after  it   with   great   rapidity,    and    if  the   unfortunate   trout  gets 

247 


24s  The   Pike 

between  their  jaws  there  is  no  escape.      Down  it  goes  head  first,   to 
be   followed    by   others    as    fast    as    captured.      At    night    they   leave 


o 

o 


>> 

J~l 

p 

f-\ 

"33 


> 

2 


their  hiding  places  in  the  deep  pools,  come  out  on  the  shallows  and 
range  about  after  trout,  but  when   daylight  comes,  like  guilty  beings, 


The   Pike 


249 


they  fall  back  again  into  the  deeper  pools.  Their  movements  are 
performed  so  quietly  that  it  is  difficult  to  know  whether  they  are  in 
a  pool  or  not.  They  are  also  very  difficult  to  net,  for  if  the  bottom  of 
the  river  be  full  of  mud  they  will  sink  into  it  and  allow  the  net  to 
pass  over  them.  If  there  is  no  mud  they  keep  near  the  surface  and 
watch  what  is  going  on,  and  so  keep  clear  of  it. 

Two  large  pike  used  to  frequent  a  pool  on  the  river  Earn  below 
a  weir,  which  was  regularly  netted,  but  the  pike  always  escaped 
capture.  I  have  often  watched  their  movements  from  the  top  of  this 
weir.  If  they  were  near  the  side  I  was  on,  and  I  stood  opposite  them, 
they  at  once  moved  quietly  away,  keeping  within  a  foot  ot  the  surface 
and  proceeding  sideways  often  for  a  distance  of  60  yards.  As  soon 
as  I  went,  out  of  their  sight  they  gradually  returned  to  their  favourite 
haunts.  When  once  disturbed  they  act  so  warily  that  it  is  very 
difficult  to  catch  them  with  a  sweep-net.  A  drift  or  hang  net  left  in 
the  water  during  night  suits  the  purpose  better. 

During  hot  weather,  in  summer,  many  pike  frequent  shallow  water 
and  bask  in  the  sun.  Here  they  can  easily  be  shot.  In  lochs  which 
contain  nothing  but  pike  attempts  to  reduce  their  number  often  defeat 
the  end  in  view,  for  only  the  large  ones  are  captured,  and  the  small 
ones  are  left  without  fear  of  being  molested  by  their  larger  brethren. 
Owing  to  the  small  price  obtained  for  pike  in  the  market  they  are  not 
worth  keeping  for  profit.  Those  found  in  stagnant  lochs  are  not 
at  all  palatable,  whereas  those  caught  in  clear  lochs  and  rivers  where 
food  is  abundant  are  usually  quite  good.  One  often  hears  of  very 
large  pike  being  caught,  but  as  far  as  I  can  learn  no  pike  has 
been  caught  in  this  country  during  the  last  forty  years  whose 
weight  has  exceeded  45  Ibs.,  and  very  few  have  been  caught  35 
Ibs.  in  weight. 


THE    PERCH 

(Perca  fluviatilis] 

THE  perch  is  distributed  generally  over  Great  Britain,  and  is  a 
very  handsome  fish.  Its  back  is  olive-coloured,  the  sides  yellow,  the 
belly  white,  and  there  are  six  well-defined  dark  bands  along  the  sides. 
The  dorsal  fin,  the  chief  weapon  of  defence,  has  twelve  spines, 
which  often  draw  blood  from  the  unwary  angler's  hand.  Below  this 
is  another  dorsal  fin  without  spines.  The  ventral,  anal,  and  tail  fins 
are  tipped  with  scarlet.  The  scales  are  large  and  hard.  The  gill- 
cover  is  also  hard  and  bony  and  ends  in  a  sharp  point,  which  is  also 
used  in  defence.  The  flesh  of  the  perch  is  excellent. 

Perch  as  a  rule  proceed  in  shoals  and  frequent  quiet  parts  of  a 
river.  Few  are  found  in  quick-running  rivers.  In  many  lochs  they 
simply  swarm,  and  if  food  is  plentiful,,  grow  to  a  large'  size.  The 
largest  I  have  ever  seen  came  from  a  small  loch  in  Cambridgeshire, 
and  turned  the  scale  at  5  Ibs.  In  Scotland  they  seldom  exceed  3  Ibs. 
in  weight,  the  average  weight  in  many  lochs  being  about  i  Ib. 
They  spawn  in  May  and  are  very  prolific.  The  ova,  like  that  of 
the  pike,  is  attached  to  branches  and  weeds.  By  the  middle  of 
August  the  perch  fry  are  about  an  inch  long  and  sport  about  in 
large  shoals.  Trout  and  other  fish  feed  much  upon  them,  and  I 
have  frequently  caught  trout  whose  stomachs  contained  many  perch 
fry.  It  is  interesting  to  watch  trout  devouring  these  fry.  One's 
attention  is  usually  drawn  to  them  by  seeing  a  number  of  terns  dive 
down  into  the  loch,  and  on  approaching  the  scene  of  action  one  sees 

the  surface  of  the  water  all  eddying  and  swirling  with  trout  chasing 

250 


The   Perch  251 

the  fry  and  making  such  slaughter  and  commotion  that  anglers  call 
it  "  Waterloo."  So  numerous  are  they  that  when  the  angler  casts 
his  flies  among  them  he  usually  hooks  two  or  three  large  trout 
at  the  first  cast,  and  so  eager  are  they  in  pursuit  of  their  prey  that 
many  cause  themselves  to  be  foul-hooked.  Xot  only  is  the  number 
of  perch  reduced  in  this  way,  but  vast  numbers  are  destroyed  by 
storms.  Shoals  of  them  in  shallow  water  are  driven  ashore  during 
a  gale.  Shortly  after  the  great  storm  which  blew  down  the  Tay 
Bridge  I  had  occasion  to  be  shooting  on  Loch  Leven,  and  found  the 


FIG.  241.— 2-lb.  Perch  (Para  fluviatilis).     River  Earn,  February  1900. 

shore  to  the  width  of  about  100  yards,  and  extending  for  several 
miles,  strewn  with  dead  perch,  undeniable  evidence  of  the  destruction 
caused  by  wind  and  waves.  For  years  after  this  they  were  not  nearly 
so  plentiful  as  formerly.  Perch  are  in  best  condition  from  September 
to  the  end  of  December. 

The  perch  is  not  at  all  a  shy  fish,  and  it  will  take  almost  any  bait. 
A  young  friend  of  mine  on  one  occasion  when  fishing  for  perch  had 
used  all  his  worms.  Tearing  a  strip  of  red  wool  from  one  of  his 
garments,  he  fastened  a  small  piece  of  it  to  his  hook  and  continued 
to  bring  the  perch  ashore  almost  as  frequently  as  he  had  done  with 


252 


The   Perch 


the  live  bait.  When  one  drops  his  bait  among  a  shoal  of  them  he 
picks  them  out  very  rapidly.  Proceeding  in  shoals  they  are  easily 
netted,  and  I  have  seen  hundreds  taken  at  one  draw  of  the  net. 
The  finest  specimens  to  be  got  in  central  Scotland  are  caught  in 
Lindores  Loch.  I  have  seldom  got  them  here  less  than  i-i-  Ibs.,  and 
on  many  occasions  from  2  to  3  Ibs.  in  weight.  In  the  "  Loch  o'  the 
Lowes  "  near  Dunkeld,  too,  are  some  very  large  perch.  Large  ones 
are  also  to  be  found  in  the  river  Isla  and  the  river  Earn,  but  they  are 
seldom  fished  for.  Perch  thrive  in  stagnant  water  where  trout  could 
not  live. 


FIG.  242. — Sea  Lice.      Life  size. 


THE   TENCH 

(Tinea  vulgaris] 

TENCH  are  not  so  widely  distributed  as  the  perch,  but  they  are 
found  in  many  lochs.  In  Scotland  they  are  difficult  to  catch  and  are 
not  often  seen.  They  prefer  weedy  lochs  to  more  open  water. 
Those  that  are  swept  from  the  lochs  into  our  quick-running  rivers 
soon  disappear.  In  no  river  that  I  know  of  in  Scotland  have  they 
established  themselves.  It  is  said  that  pike  will  not  eat  them. 


253 


254 


The  Tench 


o 

c 

OJ 

J 

u-> 
I 

rn 
M 


THE    STICKLEBACK 

( Gastrosteus  aculeatus] 

THE  illustration  given  (Fig.  244)  is  the  natural  size  of  the  three-spined 
stickleback.  There  are  said  to  be  several  kinds,  but  the  above  is 
the  one  which  is  most  plentiful  all  over  Scotland.  Every  stream, 
river,  and  ditch  contains  them,  and  they  are  also  got  in  the  sea  all 
round  our  coasts.  They  spawn  in  June,  but  before  doing  so  a 
rough  nest  is  made,  in  which  the  female  deposits  her  eggs.  These 
are  hatched  in  from  twenty-one  to  twenty-five  days.  While  the  eggs 
are  in  the  nest  the  male  becomes  very  brilliantly  coloured.  His 
belly  is  scarlet,  his  sides  silvery,  and  his  back  yellow  and  green  ;  the 
female,  on  the  other  hand,  is  usually  of  an  olive  green.  He  then 
keeps  a  strict  watch  over  nest  and  eggs,  and  allows  no  intruder  to 
come  near. 

By  December  the  young  are  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch  long. 
I  have  on  many  occasions  kept  them  in  a  glass  globe  along  with 
minnows,  but  the  sticklebacks  always  killed  the  latter.  The  usual 
mode  of  attack  was  to  swim  close  up  to  the  minnow  with  fins  spread 
out  and  to  dash  at  it  sideways,  using  the  hard  spine  in  striking. 
The  minnow  slipped  out  of  reach  for  a  moment,  but  the  stickleback 
renewed  the  attack  in  the  same  way  three  or  four  times,  after  which 
the  minnow  fell  lifeless  to  the  bottom  of  the  glass.  The  greatest 
number  of  sticklebacks  I  have  seen  was  at  the  outlet  of  Loch  Leven. 
Here  they  are  drawn  through  the  sluices,  and  being  unable  to  re-enter 
the  loch,  the  water  at  this  part  literally  swarms  with  them. 

If  a  new  loch   is  made  or  an   old  one  enlarged  these   interesting 

255 


256 


The   Stickleback 


little  fish  are  soon  found  in  great  numbers  in  them.  More  especially 
is  this  the  case  if  the  loch  is  understocked  with  trout.  One  loch 
which  I  made  was  simply  alive  with  sticklebacks  for  about  20  feet 
all  round,  but  when  I  introduced  a  few  thousand  trout  the  number 
of  sticklebacks  was  very  soon  reduced.  Their  favourite  haunts  are 
the  backwaters  of  streams,  the  sides  of  lochs  among  weeds,  small 
ponds,  and  ditches. 


FIG.  244. — The  Three-spined  Stickleback 


THE    MINNOW 
(Leuciscus  phoxinus] 

THE    minnow    is    said    to    belong    to    the    carp    family.      It    is    found 
in  all   parts  of  Great  Britain.      They  are  usually  from   2^  to  4  inches 


• 


FIG.  245. — The  Minnow. 

long,  and  where  not  too  plentiful  and  lood  is  abundant  sometimes 
grow  to  5  inches  and  weigh  as  much  as  3  oz.  In  a  pond  near 
Perth  they  grow  to  a  large  size  and  are  shaped  like  perch.  They 
are  found  both  in  lochs  and  streams,  and  roam  about  in  shoals.  In 
warm  weather  they  proceed  up  streams  for  long  distances,  and  spawn 
in  June.  A  gravelly  stream  is  selected,  where  great  numbers 
collect  together  ;  the  stream  often  appearing  quite  black  with  them. 
As  the  spawning  season  approaches  they  assume  a  variety  of 
colours.  Some  of  them  are  black  with  white  dots,  others  red,  and 
others  dark  olive.  Before  the  spawning  season  they  are  usually 

257  33 


258  The   Minnow 

olive  on  the  back,  silvery  on  the  sides,  and  white  on  the  belly. 
Minnows  make  excellent  spinning  bait  for  trout  and  salmon  ;  and 
are  often  used  alive  for  perch,  which  take  them  freely.  During  the 
summer  months  trout  make  great  havoc  among  them,  as  they  come 
on  to  the  shallows  at  night  and  devour  large  numbers. 


THE    COMMON    EEL 
(Anguilla  vulgaris) 

THE  eel  has  a  wide  distribution  and,  wherever  there  is  water,  is 
found  all  over  Great  Britain.  Some  say  there  is  more  than  one 
species,  as  one  has  a  sharp  nose  and  another  a  broad  nose. 
Professor  Grassi  explains  this  by  stating  that  the  sharp-nosed  eels 
are  the  males  and  the  broad-nosed  ones  the  females  and  immature 
males.  According  to  Professor  Grassi,  the  eel  does  not  arrive  at 
maturity  until  it  is  five  or  six  years  old.  If  this  is  the  case  there  must 
be  a  very  great  difference  in  the  weight  of  eels  of  the  same  age, 
because  many  of  them  migrate  when  under  i  Ib.  in  weight,  while 
others  are  from  i  to  6  and  even  8  Ibs. 

The  eel  fisheries  of  Ireland  are  of  considerable  value,  one  bringing 
a  rental  of  over  ^2000.  Where  food  is  plentiful  eels  grow  to  a  large 
size.  In  Loch  Leven  they  often  weigh  6  or  7  Ibs.,  and  I  have  known 
them  to  exceed  this  weight  in  the  river  Tay.  If  they  are  prevented 
from  going  to  the  sea  they  live  to  a  good  old  age.  I  know  of  one 
in  a  small  pond  which  looked  quite  10  Ibs.  ten  years  ago,  and  is 
still  alive  and  manages  to  frustrate  all  attempts  to  capture  it.  The 
pond  in  which  it  lives  contains  small  perch  and  the  largest  minnows 
I  have  ever  seen. 

The  eel  .fry  come  up  all  our  rivers  in  countless  thousands, 
distributing  themselves  over  every  stream  and  loch  in  Great  Britain. 
They  appear  in  the  Tay  about  the  2Oth  of  April,  when  both  sides  of 
the  river  to  the  width  of  about  10  yards  are  crowded  with  them.  In 

their  movement  upwards  on  a  quiet  day  they  make   a  ripple  like   that 

259 


260 


The   Common   Eel 


caused  by  wind  blowing  along   the    surface   of  water.     At   this   time 

they  are  from  3  to  4  inches  long.  The 
migration  continues  for  about  a  fortnight, 
during  which  nothing  seems  too  difficult 
for  them  to  surmount.  If  the  rush  of 
water  is  too  strong  for  them,  they  wriggle 
up  the  side  among  the  wet  grass.  On 
one  occasion  a  large  stone  had  fallen  out 
of  the  side  of  a  bye-wash  and  left  a 
large  opening,  which  on  examination 
was  found  to  contain  a  living  mass  of 
eels.  I  put  a  pitcher  underneath  it, 
stirred  up  the  eels,  and  withdrew  the 
pitcher  full  of  them,  while  many  others 
made  good  their  escape.  At  this  time 
whitling,  sea-trout,  and  brown  trout 
gorge  themselves  with  the  young  elvers. 
After  the  young  fry  pass  up  (Fig. 
247)  older  eels  from  6  to  30  inches 
long  continue  during  the  whole  summer 
to  advance  higher  up.  I  have  proved 
this  on  many  occasions  by  shutting  off 
the  water  from  mill-wheels  and  finding 
eels  wriggling  below  in  great  numbers. 
They  run  most  during  the  night.  On 
the  ist  of  August  last  year  I  had  occa- 
sion to  watch  the  water  passing  through 
a  sluice  at  Loch  More.  The  force  of 
the  water  was  so  great  that  the  eels 
were  unable  to  push  through,  and  at 
midnight  the  pool  below  the  sluice  was 
a  seething  mass  of  eels  of  all  sizes  up 

to  30  inches  long,  but  as  soon  as  the  sun  appeared   in  the  morning 
none  were  to  be  seen,  all  having  fallen  back  into  the  pools  below. 


o 

o 


OJ 

"a. 
c/2 


jfl 

vO 


I 
I 

<3 


a 

o 

a 

o 

U 


The   Common   Eel  26i 

The  migration  to  the  sea  usually  takes  place  in  September  and 
October.  A  dark,  wet,  windy  night  is  their  favourite  time,  when  they 
collect  in  great  shoals,  thousands  of  them  sometimes  crowded  together. 
I  have  often  seen  them  during  the  winter  come  from  under  stones  and 
from  holes  in  dykes  when  the  water  was  let  off  mill-lades.  Many  of 
these  were  2  feet  long.  The  eel  has  little  difficulty  in  finding  food,  as 
most  larvae  live  under  stones  where  the  eels  hide.  Eels,  too,  are  very 
destructive  to  young  salmon,  for  they  devour  large  numbers  from  the 
fry  up  to  the  smolt  stage. 


FIG.  247. — Young  Eels.     July  1909. 

There  is  no  better  bait  for  a  large  eel  than  a  parr  or  a  smolt,  and 
if  one  is  cast  into  a  pool  where  there  are  large  eels  one  of  them  soon 
picks  it  up.  I  have  often  fished  during  the  night  with  natural  bait, 
and  if  it  was  warm  and  thundery,  eels  were  so  eager  to  take  the  bait 
that  I  have  had  to  leave  the  pool  I  intended  fishing.  In  Scotland  eels 
are  allowed  a  free  passage  to  and  from  the  sea,  as  there  are  no  eel 
fisheries  and  few  people  try  to  catch  them  with  the  rod.  In  most,  if 
not  all,  eel  fisheries  they  are  only  caught  during  the  downward  migra- 
tion, but  I  am  of  opinion  that  if  eel  fishers  were  to  try  to  catch  them 
during  their  upward  migration  a  continuous  supply  could  be  obtained 
from  May  to  October.  In  all  our  large  estuaries  swarms  of  eels 
could  be  found  during  the  summer  months,  for  they  are  constantly 
running  up.  It  seems  to  me  that,  besides  the  migration  of  the  elvers, 
there  is  a  continual  migration  inland  of  eels  of  a  larger  size,  which 
swim  along  the  bottom  and  across  the  whole  width  of  the  river,  and 


262 


The   Common   Eel 


on   this   account  escape  detection.      This    is    certainly  a  matter  well 
worth  investigating. 

To  catch  the  eels  on  their  downward  course  and  allow  them  to 
escape  on  their  upward  is  not  a  wise  procedure,  for  by  the  time  they 
are  going  seawards  they  have  done  all  the  damage  they  can  do, 
while  if  caught  on  their  upward  progress  a  marketable  size  two  or 
three  years  old  could  be  got.  This  arrangement  would  prevent  an 
enormous  destruction  of  salmon  fry,  for  I  consider  the  eel  by  far  the 
greatest  enemy  that  salmon  and  trout  have.  The  young  of  the  salmon 
hide  under  stones  during  the  winter,  and  an  eel  after  a  fish  is  like  a 
ferret  after  a  rabbit — it  can  not  only  go  wherever  a  trout  can  go,  but 
its  body  remains  concealed  under  a  stone,  with  only  its  mouth  and  its 
eyes  exposed  to  view.  There  he  lies  in  wait  for  any  living  thing  that 
comes  near  him. 

Not  until  April  1906  was  it  known  where  eels  spawned.  Professor 
Grassi,  of  Rome,  discovered  the  breeding-ground  to  be  out  in  the 
Atlantic  Ocean  from  Norway,  Denmark,  France,  and  Spain,  in  some 
parts  1000  miles  from  shore,  at  a  depth  of  560  fathoms,  with  the 
eel  larvae  50  to  100  fathoms  overlying  this  depth.  The  generic 
name  "  Leptocephalus "  was  applied  to  the  eel  larvae  before  their 
history  was  known. 

The  Leptocephalus  develops  from  the  egg,  grows  to  the  length 
of  about  3  inches,  then  ceases  to  feed  until  the  metamorphosis 
is  complete  and  the  little  fish  has  become  an  elver.  These  larvae 
have  perfectly  clear  ribbonlike  bodies,  which  are  as  transparent  as 
glass,  and  free  from  colouring,  except  in  the  case  of  the  eyes,  which  are 
black.  Their  length  is  about  3  inches  and  their  breadth  three-eighths. 
The  metamorphosis  takes  place  in  four  stages,  and  when  complete 
the  length  is  reduced  to  about  2^-  inches,  and  the  width  to  a  little  more 
than  one-eighth.  When  in  the  sea  they  are  known  as  glass  elvers, 
but  on  arriving  in  fresh  water  pigment  is  developed  in  the  skin  and 
they  are  now  known  as  elvers.  The  times  of  migration  to  our  shores 
vary  very  much.  In  some  localities  it  takes  place  in  December,  and 
in  others  not  till  April.  In  the  Shannon  district  it  is  as  early  as 


The   Common   Eel  263 

January,  while  in  the  Tay  district  it  is  about  the  2Oth  of  April.  On 
1 2th  June  1909  I  saw  large  numbers  of  eel  fry  running  up  the  Tay 
and  side  streams,  which  run  lasted  well  into  October.  I  also  noticed 
them  running  up  the  river  Allan,  a  tributary  of  the  Forth,  during 
November.  The  Forth  District  Fishery  Board  have  lately  erected  a 
fish-pass  here,  and  during  a  recent  visit  I  found  the  river  in  flood. 
Owing  to  a  part  between  the  fish-pass  and  the  existing  bank  of  the  river 
not  having  been  properly  filled  in,  hundreds  of  eels  got  up  into  this 
and  could  proceed  no  farther.  The  superintendent  and  I  measured  a 
number  and  found  them  to  be  about  9  inches  in  length.  There  is 
little  doubt  that  this  is  the  average  length  attained  during  their  first 
season.  Of  course  there  may  have  been  others  of  a  larger  size 
lurking  in  the  pools  below,  waiting  for  more  favourable  conditions,  but 
none  came  under  our  notice. 


RAINBOW   TROUT 

(Sal)no  iridens] 

THESE  trout  were  introduced  into  this  country  from  America  over 
twenty  years  ago.  As  time  went  on  they  were  thought  to  be  much 
superior  to  the  fario  as  sporting  fish.  They  may  be  so  in  their  own 
country,  but  our  climate  does  not  seem  to  suit  them.  In  a  few  English 
rivers  they  have  done  fairly  well,  as  also  in  Blagdon  Lake.  If  left 
to  themselves  for  a  year  or  two,  however,  I  think  they  would  all 
disappear.  I  have  had  ten  years'  experience  of  them  in  Scotland,  and 
have  introduced  them  into  many  lochs.  They  did  well  for  three  or 
four  years  and  weighed  about  i^  Ibs.  ;  but  after  that  we  saw  few 
of  them.  Some  of  them  spawned,  but  never  in  sufficient  numbers  to 
establish  themselves. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  when  introducing  rainbow  trout  into 
a  new  loch,  as  most  will  make  good  their  escape  in  a  few  days  unless 
prevented  from  so  doing  by  means  of  a  heck  or  other  obstacle.  They 
also  appear  to  have  excellent  memories,  for  if  once  hooked  and 
returned  to  the  water  you  seldom  get  a  second  chance  of  hooking 
him.  Another  drawback  is  that  they  spawn  in  April  and  May,  and 
are  not  worth  catching  until  well  on  in  the  season.  It  is  therefore 
not  advisable  to  have  trout  and  rainbow  trout  together  in  the  same 
loch.  The  best  way  to  do  with  rainbow  trout  is  to  stock  a  loch  with 
two-year-olds,  and  fish  for  them  the  following  year.  If  the  feeding 
is  good,  three-year-old  fish  should  be  from  i  to  i^  or  even  2  Ibs.  in 
weight.  In  reservoirs  where  they  cannot  get  out  they  grow  to  a 
large  size  ;  we  have  some  here  from  7  to  10  Ibs.  When  in  proper 

condition  they  are  very  good  for  the  table. 

264 


Rainbow  Trout 


265 


£ 
v 

4-J 

o, 
cu 


<u 

)M 

rt 


t/3 

rt 
u 


rt 
u 


O 

H 

o 

'rt 


34 


266  Rainbow  Trout 

Rainbow  trout  are  so  named  because  the  colours  of  their  sides 
resemble  those  of  a  rainbow.  They  can  be  easily  distinguished  from 
a  trout,  both  by  their  colour  and  the  greater  number  of  spots  (see 
Fig.  249).  In  New  Zealand,  where  they  have  rich  feeding,  they  grow 
to  over  20  Ibs.  and  rise  to  fly.  It  is  strange,  however,  that  in  this 
country  when  they  become  2  Ibs.  or  more  in  weight  they  seldom  rise 
to  a  fly.  When  hooked  they  jump  out  of  the  water  like  sea-trout, 
and  fight  well  to  the  last. 


Rainbow  Trout 


267 


:-.v^..^  ,.','?*•  .vv^j-.;^.^-v.>..v.^»v.'      -si^P^ 

^*  •'•••'•        ''••   '-    '- '  -  •  • 


FIG.  249. — 2-lb.  Rainbow  Trout,  four  years  old,  caught  at  Bnttleby  Loch.     August  1904. 


FIG.  250.  —  i-lb.  Rainbow  Trout,  two  years  old.     Loch  Dupplin.      May  1904. 


268 


Monstrosities 


H 

OJ 
JS 


t/3 

rt 
u 


o 

!H 

H 

c 


MONSTROSITIES 

ONE'S   curiosity  is   often   excited  by  the   capture   of  a  deformed   fish. 
The  causes  of  malformation  are  not  well  known,  and  are  difficult  to 


FIG.  252. — i-lb.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  Loch  Clashfern,  Sutherland.     July  1904. 

account  for.  I  show  photographs  of  a  few  of  those  I  have  seen. 
I  am  of  opinion  that  many  of  these  malformations  are  caused  by 
starvation.  Lochs  that  are  overstocked  and  in  which  the  spawning- 
ground  becomes  too  prolific,  and  lochs  in  which  the  trout  are  in  poor 
condition  and  do  not  grow  to  more  than  3  or  4  oz.,  contain  many 
deformed  trout. 

In  Loch  Clashfern  in  Sutherlandshire  I  have  captured  three  or 
four  monstrosities  in  one  day.  Many  deformed  trout  may  also  be  seen 
coming  from  the  hatcheries,  having  double  heads,  deformed  heads,  de- 
fective fins,  and  short  gills.  These  defects,  of  course,  have  an  injurious 

269 


270 


Monstrosities 


FIG.  253.  — i|-lb.  Deformed  Sea-Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay.     July  1907. 


FIG.  254. — Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  the  Tay.      May  1904. 


Monstrosities 


271 


c 

J5 

£ 

o 
H 

"rt 
4-1 

.C 


rt 
u 


2 


u 

c 


O 


. 


rt 

oT 

E/3 

*C 

O 

i> 

E 

%• 

C 

^5 


U 


2/2 


Monstrosities 


~>i  ?*••', 
**s" ' 


,  • 


I 


E 
rt 


IT. 

c 

"5 

_£ 

u 

c 


cj 
o 


p 
O 


Monstrosities 


273 


o 
o 

in 


fcJD 


rt 
u 


T3 

HI 


OJ 

Q 


35 


2/4 


Monstrosities 


<§ 


t/) 


ci 
o 


rt 
v. 

O 

^ 

0) 

£ 


a*- 


Monstrosities 


275 


effect  on  the  growth  of  the  fish  all  through  its  life.  In  hatcheries 
overcrowding  would  seem  to  be  the  cause  of  these  malformations. 
Deformed  trout,  however,  are  also  found  in  rivers  and  lochs  where 
overcrowding  is  impossible  and  food  plentiful,  so  that  deformities  may 
be  due  to  other  causes,  such  as  injury  to  the  eggs  or  fry  (see  Fig.  251). 
Many  deformed  trout  are  found  similar  to  this  (see  Fig.  252).  Such 
deformity  could  scarcely  be  caused  by  injury  to  the  eggs  or  fry.  It 
points  more  to  want  of  development,  and  very  likely  the  parent  would 


FIG.  260. — 2-lb.  Deformed  Trout,  caught  in  Loch  Dupplin.     December  1907. 

have  a  similar  short  head.  The  twisted  backs  may  be  caused  by  a 
weak  spine.  There  are  fewer  deformities  among  salmon  and  sea- 
trout  than  among  trout.  Perhaps  they  may  not  be  able  to  survive 
in  the  sea,  and  die  off.  Hundreds  of  salmon  are  found  with  so  great 
gashes  in  them,  made  by  seals  and  other  enemies,  that  it  is  a  wonder 
they  manage  to  live.  These  injuries  often  heal  up,  but  one  can  always 
note  their  effect  on  the  fish,  as  they  retard  growth,  causing  them 
to  become  thin  and  of  inferior  condition.  Many  monstrosities  are  seen 
in  the  salmon  hatcheries.  Some  of  them  have  two  heads,  while  some- 
times two  are  joined  together,  as  we  occasionally  see  in  the  case  of 
beasts  and  birds.  As  a  rule  these  fish  die  when  about  six  weeks  old. 
When  deformed  fish  are  discovered  they  should  be  destroyed. 


HYBRIDS 

THERE   is  not    the   least  doubt   that  in  nature    many  hybrids  are    to 
be  found.      Sea-trout    may  often  be  seen    spawning  with    grilse,   and 


FIG.  261. — i-lb.  Zebra,  cross  between  American  Char  and  Loch  Leven  Trout. 

trout  with  sea-trout.  These  being  so  much  alike,  it  would  be  almost 
impossible  to  tell  whether  the  offspring  were  crosses  or  not.  Sir 
James  Maitland  carried  out  many  experiments  at  his  Howieton 
Fisheries  in  crossing  brown  trout  with  salmon,  char  with  salmon  parr, 
American  char  with  Loch  Leven  trout.  The  latter  cross  he  called  a 
"zebra."  See  illustration  of  one  bred  in  Howieton  Fisheries  (Fig. 
261).  This  fish  was  light  scarlet  on  the  belly  and  had  peculiar  mark- 
ings along  the  side,  as  shown  in  the  photograph.  For  a  description 
of  these  experiments  I  refer  the  reader  to  Day  s  British  and  Irish 
Salmonidcz.  If  these  experiments  have  clone  nothing  to  improve  the 

breed  of  fish,  they  have  at  least  proved  that  crossing  is  possible. 

276 


VENDACE 

(Coregonus  vandesius] 

THIS  fish  is  only  found  in  Loch  Maben,  Dumfriesshire,  and  is  said 
to  be  so  delicate  that  it  dies  as  soon  as  taken  from  the  water,  and 
cannot  be  transferred  to  any  other  loch.  No  angler  has  yet  been 
able  to  catch  one  with  a  hook,  and  they  are  usually  caught  with  a 
sweep-net.  The  flesh  of  the  vendace  is  considered  a  great  delicacy, 
so  great  that  many  years  ago  a  number  of  gentlemen  arranged  to 
meet  and  "  feast  "  on  what  were  caught.  It  is  not  known  whether  all 
the  vendace  in  the  loch  were  eaten  up  or  not,  but  no  such  "  feast  "  has 
again  been  held.  These  fish  are  now  so  very  scarce  that  it  was  with 
difficulty  I  obtained  the  specimen  illustrated  on  page  278.  This 
specimen  is  now  in  the  British  Museum.  It  measured  7^-  inches  in 
length,  which  is  much  above  the  average  size.  The  colour  of  the 
back  is  light  green,  while  the  sides  are  silvery  white.  The  tail  is  well 
forked,  and  the  dorsal,  pectoral,  and  anal  fins  are  long  and  pointed, 
thus  giving  the  fish  greater  power  in  swimming  through  the  water. 
Perhaps  the  reason  for  their  not  taking  a  bait  is  that  they  only  feed 
on  minute  Crustacea  or  daphnise,  which  are  inhaled  along  with  the 
water  while  breathing. 


277 


2  78 


Vendace 


c 

3 


c 

<U 


u 

o 


O 

rt 

13 
C 
U 


O 

£ 


GWYNIAD 

THIS  is  another  fish  very  like  the  vendace,  and  is  found  in  England 
and  Wales.  Some  of  the  lakes  in  Cumberland  contain  them.  The 
specimens  I  have  seen  from  Derwentwater  average  about  8  inches 
long.  Mr.  Tait  Regan  of  the  British  Museum  mentions  this  fish  as 
being  closely  allied  to  the  vendace  of  Loch  Maben,  although  it 
is  by  no  means  identical.  From  the  photographs,  however,  it  would 
be  difficult  to  tell  the  one  from  the  other.  The  colour  and  shape  are 
like  those  of  the  vendace,  and  the  fins  of  both  are  also  alike.  They 
are  seldom  caught  with  a  hook,  and  little  is  known  about  them. 


279 


280 


Gwyniad 


3- 


o 

rt 


THE    POWAN    OF    LOCH    LOMOND 
( Coregonus  clupeoides) 

POWAN  are  found  in  large  numbers  in  Loch  Lomond,  and  are  said  to 
attain  to  the  weight  of  2  Ibs.  None  of  the  specimens  I  have  seen, 
however,  weighed  more  than  i  Ib.  The  powan  is  a  beautiful  fish. 
The  head  and  back  are  light  olive  brown,  and  the  fins  light  slate 
colour.  The  scales  above  the  lateral  line  are  well  defined  in  eight 
rows,  while  below  the  lateral  line  to  the  anal  fin  there  are  also  eight 
well-defined  rows.  The  scales  are  silvery  like  those  of  a  grayling, 
and  the  belly  is  white  and  covered  with  scales.  The  eyes  are  very 
large,  and  the  upper  edge  is  on  a  level  with  the  head.  The  centre  of 
the  eye  is  black  and  is  surrounded  by  silver,  wrhile  the  side  of  the  head 
is  like  burnished  silver  intermingled  writh  irradiating  pink  colour.  The 
number  of  rays  on  the  fins  are  as  follows  :  the  dorsal  eleven  ;  the 
second  none  ;  the  pectoral  seventeen  ;  the  anal  ten ;  the  ventral  ten  ; 
the  caudal  twenty.  The  specimen  figured  was  12  inches  long,  and 
weighed  three-quarters  of  a  pound.  Like  all  the  others  I  examined, 
its  stomach  was  full  of  daphnise.  This  is  their  principal  food,  although 
I  have  occasionally  found  them  to  feed  on  the  larvse  of  the  blood- 
worm. The  scales  are  like  those  of  the  salmon,  except  that  the  rings 
continue  right  round.  The  rings  are  well  defined,  showing  that  the 
feeding  has  been  rich.  From  the  number  of  rings  I  make  the  age 
of  the  specimen  shown  to  be  four  years. 

Powan    are    rather    coarse    for    the    table.      Large    numbers    are 
netted    in    Loch   Lomond   and  sent   to  the   markets,   and  occasionally 

they  are  caught  by  the  angler.      Loch  Lomond  is  of  vast  size,  24  miles 

281 


282 


The   Powan   of  Loch   Lomond 


c 
c: 


^3 
QJ 


<U 
N 


o 

"O 
OJ 


'     f 


The   Powan   of  Loch   Lomond 


283 


long  by  5  miles  wide  at  its  greatest  breadth,  and  contains  twenty-four 
islands,  some  of  which  are  very  large.  It  is  thus  a  perfect  breeding- 
place  for  Crustacea,  and  there  being  so  little  run  on  the  loch,  they  are 
not  carried  away.  In  this  respect  it  resembles  a  town's  reservoir  with 
screens  at  the  outlet  so  fine  that  daphnise  cannot  pass  through, 
with  the  result  that  inside  the  reservoir  is  a  mass  of  insect  life,  and 
trout  brought  among  them  have  only  to  open  and  close  their  mouths 
to  get  enough  food  to  sustain  them  and  make  them  grow  to  a  large 
size.  See  photograph  of  daphnise  taken  from  the  stomach  of  a  powan 
(Fig.  266). 


FIG.  266. — Daphniit,  life  size. 


THE    FLOUNDER 
(Pleuronectes  ftcsns] 

THE  freshwater  flounder  or  fluke  inhabits  all  the  rivers  in  Great 
Britain  except  those  that  have  barriers  or  those  into  which  it  has 
not  been  introduced.  The  usual  barriers  which  prevent  their  ascent 
are  waterfalls,  weirs,  and  strong  currents.  The  shape  of  the  flounder 
makes  it  ill-adapted  for  surmounting  obstacles.  The  moment  they 
rise  from  the  bottom  of  the  stream  the  rushing  water  takes  hold  of 
them,  and  they  are  washed  down.  I  have  never  seen  flounders  in 
rivers  that  have  weirs  with  a  gradient  of  one  in  twelve.  The  greatest 
number  are  found  in  estuaries  of  rivers  and  in  lochs.  The  flounder 
is  not  at  all  particular  as  to  what  it  eats,  and  can  be  caught  with 
almost  any  bait.  In  fresh  water  they  are  usually  caught  with  worm. 
Salmon  net-fishers  catch  them  all  day  long,  the  greatest  number  in 
the  rising  tide.  The  eyes  are  very  large  and  are  placed  on  the  right 
side.  The  belly  also  is  on  the  right  side,  which  is  peculiar. 

Once  when  catching  flounders  in  the  river  Tay  a  wag  asked  me 
if  those  I  had  were  Tay  flounders  or  Earn  flounders.  After  looking 
at  them  he  said  they  were  all  Tay  flounders,  because  their  eyes  were 
all  on  the  right  side  ;  therefore,  on  ascending  from  the  sea,  they  could 
not  see  the  Earn,  as  the  latter  joined  the  Tay  on  their  left.  The 
eyes  placed  in  this  position  enable  the  fish  to  see  all  round  it,  even 
when  flat  on  the  ground.  The  eyes  enable  it,  also,  to  change  its 
colour  according  to  the  nature  of  the  soil  it  is  resting  on.  This 
changing  of  colour  goes  on  continually  from  dark  to  light,  and 

from  light  to  dark,  all   "  in   the  twinkling  of  an  eye."     When  the  fish 

284 


The   Flounder 


285 


moves  from  the  dark  to  the  light  the  eye  conveys  the  impression  to 
the  brain,  which  in  turn  sends  it  on  to  the  cells  all  over  the  back,  and 


<u 

T3 
C 

o 


these  open  or  close  to  make  the  back  the  same  colour  as  the  ground  on 
which  the  fish  is  resting.  This  changing  of  colour  continues  for  a  time 
after  the  fish  is  dead,  and  may  be  seen  by  removing  the  fish  from  a 


286 


The   Flounder 


light-coloured  place  to  a  dark.   This  provisionof  nature  prevents  its  being 
detected  by  enemies,  and,  no  doubt,  saves  its  life  on  many  occasions. 


"3 

'8 


00 
•-O 


The  tins  of  the  flounder  are  also  peculiar.  The  dorsal  fin  extends 
from  head  to  tail  on  the  left  side,  and  increases  in  breadth  to  the 
middle,  and  tapers  down  again  to  the  tail.  It  has  fifty-five  rays.  The 


The   Flounder  287 

anal  fin,  which  commences  below  the  ventral  fin,  is  also  broader  at  the 
centre  of  the  body,  and  has  thirty-eight  rays.  The  pectoral  fin  has 
nine  rays  on  the  upper  and  nine  on  the  under  side.  The  ventral  fin 
has  six,  and  the  caudal  fifteen  rays.  In  rivers  flounders  are  seldom 
caught  over  i|-  Ibs.  In  Loch  Speggie  in  Shetland  I  have  caught 
them  over  2  Ibs.,  while  in  the  sea  they  grow  to  a  larger  size.  They 
are  quite  good  for  the  table.  Occasionally  flounders  are  found  with 
their  eyes  and  belly  on  the  left  side  instead  of  the  right. 


ALLIS    SHAD 
(Clupea  alosa] 

THE  allis  shad  is  found  in  a  number  of  rivers  during  the  spawning 
season,  which  occurs  in  June  and  July.  This  fish  is  not  so  well  known 
in  Scotland  as  it  is  in  England.  A  fair  number  are  caught  by  the 
nets  on  the  Tay,  and  those  I  have  examined  have  invariably  been 
filled  with  spawn.  The  average  weight  of  those  that  have  come 
under  my  notice  was  about  5  Ibs.  It  is  a  short  thick  fish  about  20 
inches  in  length.  The  dorsal  fin,  consisting  of  sixteen  rays,  is  very 
small  for  the  size  of  such  a  fish,  and  the  tail  is  very  much  forked. 
The  tail  has  twenty-five  rays,  pectoral  fin  fourteen,  ventral  fourteen, 
and  the  dorsal  eight. 

Characteristic  of  this  fish  is  the  colouring.  The  back  is  of  a  light 
slate  colour  merging  into  a  bright  silver  on  the  sides  and  becoming 
quite  white  on  the  belly.  The  latter  is  covered  with  strong  scales, 
which  run  along  the  under  part  from  head  to  tail  in  a  well-defined 
ridge.  Between  the  ventral  fin  and  the  tail  are  fourteen  strong  spines, 
which  no  doubt  is  the  principal  weapon  of  defence.  The  mouth  and 
head  are  very  large  and  broad,  whilst  the  eyes  have  a  large  black 
centre  surrounded  by  a  golden  colour  on  the  outer  edge.  On  opening 
the  mouth  one  is  struck  with  the  beautiful  way  the  gills  are  arranged. 
From  the  latter  numerous  branches  point  outwards  almost  to  the 
exterior,  and  are  arranged  in  sets.  The  first  set  is  quite  i^  inches 
long,  consisting  of  120  branches  closely  set  together.  Following  this 
again  comes  the  second  set,  which  are  shorter,  diminishing  to  about  an 

eighth  of  an   inch  into   the  throat,  where  the    upper  and   lower  sets 

288 


Allis  Shad 


289 


rt 


\ 

CT\ 
VO 


290 


Allis  Shad 


come  close  together,  forming  a  complete  sieve.  If  reference  be  made 
to  the  illustration  one  has  a  better  idea  of  this  beautiful  construction 
(Fig.  270). 

There  is  yet  another  shad,  known  as  the  twait  shad,  which  can  be 
identified  from  the  allis  shad  by  its  having  six  to  eight  spots  on  its 
sides,  whilst  the  former  has  only  one  behind  the  gills.  In  addition 
to  the  shads,  the  smelt  and  sturgeon  invade  our  fresh  waters. 


FIG.  270. — Mouth  of  Shad. 


THE    LOACH 
(Nemachilus  barbaiulus) 

THE  loach  is  common  to  the  rivers  of  the  United  Kingdom,  inhabit- 
ing  those   of  a    slow-running  nature.     They  invariably  seek   shelter 


FIG.  271. — The  Loach. 

under  some  flat  stone,  only  to  fall  a  prey  at  the  hands  of  some  youth 
expert  in  the  art  of  "guddling."  It  is  said  to  be  good  eating,  but  I 
have  never  known  it  to  be  eaten  by  Scotch  people.  Loach  take 
worm  freely,  but  are  of  no  sporting  value,  as  they  are  so  small,  being 
on  an  average  from  3  to  at  most  5  inches  in  length.  The  colour 
is  usually  olive  with  dark  blotches  ;  the  tail  and  dorsal  fins  are 
mottled  much  like  the  markings  on  a  feather.  In  Ireland  they 
are  frequently  used  as  a  spinning  bait  for  salmon  and  trout,  as  they  are 
much  tougher  and  stand  more  knocking  about  than  the  much-used 


minnow. 


291 


THE    LAMPREY 

( Petromyzon  m  a  rin  us ) 

IN    May   and    June    the    lamprey   ascends    our    rivers   to    spawn.     A 
number  of  these   are   frequently   caught   in  the   salmon  fishers'   nets 


Fin.  272. — Mouth  of  a  Lamprey,  showing  the  sucker  and  teeth.      Half  life  size. 

on  the  Tay,  and  are  mostly  from  24  to  30  inches  in  length,  and 
weigh  from  2  to  3  Ibs.  They  are  more  plentiful  in  England  than 
in  Scotland,  and  are  caught  for  the  market.  The  colour  is  bluish- 
green  with  brown  blotches,  merging  into  an  orange  colour  on  the 
belly. 

The  lamprey  has  a  very  characteristic  mouth.      When  opened  to 
its  fullest  extent  it  is  quite  round  and  has  the  tongue  well  armed  with 

numerous  teeth  (see   Fig.  272,   which  gives  a  very  clear  representa- 

292 


The   Lamprey 


293 


tJO 
3 


t) 


o 


a, 
S 


.£ 
"•O 


a, 


294  The   Lamprey 

tion  of  this  formidable  mouth).  The  outer  part  of  the  mouth 
is  encircled  by  a  strong  band  of  skin,  and  the  whole  forms  a  most 
perfect  sucker,  by  means  of  which  the  lamprey  attaches  itself  to 
some  stone  or  iish.  If  the  latter,  then  it  runs  a  great  risk 
of  losing  its  life.  The  lamprey  once  fixed  to  its  prey,  begins  its 
deadly  quest ;  the  outer  strong  edge  remains  stationary,  whilst  the 
teeth  commence  to  move  and  cut  up  the  flesh,  and  ultimately  gouge 
out  a  deep  hole  in  its  victim.  The  salmon  appears  to  be  a  favourite 
with  the  lamprey,  judging  by  the  number  that  have  come  under 
my  notice  marked  in  this  fashion.  Fig.  2/4  shows  a  sea-trout 
marked  by  a  lamprey.  Occasionally  they  are  brought  ashore  by 
the  nets,  firmly  fixed  to  a  salmon,  and  only  desist  when  they  see 
they  run  the  risk  of  being  caught.  I  feel  sure  that  many  salmon 
are  killed  by  the  wounds  inflicted  by  this  gnawing  creature. 


Printed  by  K.  &  R.  CLARK,  LIMITED,  Edinburgh 


BOOKS    FOR    ANGLERS 

SALMON     FISHING  WITH  A  FACSIMILE  IN  COLOURS  OF  A  MODEL  Price 

l!v   WIl  I  I  VM  SKT  ("'    I'I-Ilis  FOR  SCOTLAND,    IRELAND,  ENG-  7S.   6d. 

T^AT?  TIIW  LAM),     AND   WALES    AM)    IO    ILLUSTRATIONS  net" 

KAKL  riuuLjoUlN.  By  Post 

FROM    PHOTOGRAPHS.       (..'loth,   Gilt  top.  7g     j 0(j 

The  Athena?um. — "  Practice  is  blended  with  theory,  fact  with  fiction,  or  at  any  rate  with  anecdote/,  in  a  way  at  once 
charming  and  conclusive  as  to  his  literary  skill." 

The  Globe. — "  No  angling  writer  has  a  happier  art  in  relation,  and  none  more  ability  in  the  discussion  of  sporting  technique. 
Mr.  Hodgson  puts  '  a  world  of  meaning  '  into  a  few  fortunate  lines,  and  never  commits  the  sin  of  verbosity." 


TROUT  FISHING  lrice 

4   STUDY  OF  CONTAINING    A    FACSIMILE    IN    COLOUR    OK    A  yg_   g^ 

NATURAL  "MODEL  BOOK  OF    FLIES"  FOR    STREAM   AND  net. 

PHENOMENA.  LAKE,  ARRANGED  ACCORDING  TO  THE  MONTH  /;     />(if/I 

HY  WILLIAM  IN    WHICH    THE    LURES    ARE    APPROPRIATE.  7S     ]0d 

EARL  HODGSON. 

The  Field.  —  "The  pictured  fly-book  at  the  beginning  of  the  volume  is  undoubtedly  the  finest  piece  of  work  of  the  kind 
that  has  ever  been  produced  and  published  in  this  country,  and  comes  as  a  revelation  of  what  can  be  done.  The  flies  stand  out 
from  the  page  with  marvellous  reality.  The  illustrations  and  the  letterpress  are  well  matched.  .  .  .  We  have  not  had  more 
pleasure  from  a  book  for  a  long  time." 

The  Sporting  Times.  —  "  It  is  a  scholarly  and  charming  book,  written  by  a  man  who  knows  what  he  is  writing  about. 
There  is  fascination  in  every  chapter." 


TROUT  WATERS- 

MANAGEMENT  Lar§e  Ciown  8vo  CIoth  3s-  en. 


AND  ANGLING  net 

Outlook.  —     All  lovers  of  the  gentle  art  will  find  the  book  a  veritable  fiy  fosf 

BY  WILSON   H.  i*ade   iiii'citiii,    for    there   is  no  aspect   or   department   that    has    been 

ARMISTEAD.  forgotten."  3s-  lod- 

Scotsman.  —  "  Among  practical  works  on  the  subject  of  trout  culture  this  volume  should  take  a  foremost  place.  Its  interest 
is  not  alone  for  the  riparian  proprietor  ;  the  angler,  if  he  is  worthy  the  name,  should  be  ready  to  learn  all  he  can  regarding  the 
life-history  of  his  quarry.  Trout  M'atcrs  will  teach  him  much  that  he  should  know.'' 

AN  ANGLER'S  p™* 

WITH    12   PAGE  ILLUSTRATIONS  FROM    PHOTO-  3S.   6d. 


BY  WILLIAM  GRAPHS-     Large  Crown  8vo,  Cloth. 

EARL  HODGSON.  3s.  lOd. 

Evening:  Standard.  —"The  magic  of  Mr.  Hodgson's  writing  lies  in  two  things  :  in  the  first  place,  he  knows  how  to  write, 
he  is  man  of  letters  as  well  as  angler,  he  can  make  words  serve  his  ends  in  such  manner  as  to  carry  across  the  printed  jiagc 
the  scent  of  heather,  the  sound  of  water,  the  spirit  of  great  open  spaces,  and  the  vivid  pleasures  which  the  fisherman  knows  and 
remembers  so  well  ;  and,  in  the  second  place,  he  most  obviously  obeys  the  impulse  of  a  tremendous  enthusiasm  which  makes 
angling  with  him  a  determining  passion." 

HOW      TO      FISH  WITH     8     FULL-PAGE    ILLUSTRATIONS     FROM  1  HCC 

3s.  6d. 

BY  WILLIAM  PHOTOGRAPHS,  AND  18  SMALLER  ENGRAV-  net. 

EARL  HODGSON.  INGS  IN  THE  TEXT.     Large  Crown  8vo,  Cloth.  By  Post 

3s.  lOd. 

Scotsman.  —  "  //<>«>  to  FisJi  will  instruct  the  novice  and  interest  the  veteran  fisherman,  who  will  find  in  it  no  mere  dry-as- 
dust  discussion  of  elementary  principles  of  the  art,  but  an  entertaining  treatise  upon  many  points  which  have  been  dealt  with 
rather  perfunctorily  by  other  writers." 

Birmingha  n  Post.  —  "  A  very  admirable  piece  of  work.  In  many  directions,  especially  concerning  the  habits  of  trout, 
one  may  assuredly  learn  more  from  Mr.  Hodgson  than  from  any  other  writer.  ...  In  brief,  Mr.  Hodgson  has  written  one  of  the 
most  instructive  treatises  in  the  literature  of  angling,  and  one  full  of  the  marks  of  original  thought  and  investigation." 

MINOR  TACTICS  OF  THE  I'rfce 

OUAll/    CTDCAM     Cxn  WITH  FRONTISPIECE  PLATE  OF  FLIES  IN  3s.  6d. 

UHALIx   olntnWl.    tIL.  net 

COLOUR-FACSIMILE.      Royal  8vo,  C  loth.  net- 

BY  G.  E.  M.  SkULS  By  Post 

/SEAFORTH  AND  SOKOKTH)-'  3s.  lOd. 

Field.  —  "A  new  doctrine  of  the  chalk  stream.  Altogether  there  is  more  variety  between  these  covers  than  is  often  to  be 
found  in  volumes  of  thrice  the  bulk.  The  book  is  one  of  the  most  important  yet  written  on  the  subject  of  Chalk  Stream  Fishing." 

Daily  Chronicle.  —  "  The  work  is  full  of  practical  hints  for  the  fly-fisher,  and  the  author's  descriptions  of  the  sport  his 
methods  have  brought  him  are  admirable." 

PUBLISHED    BY    A.    &     C.     BLACK,    4,    5,    &   6    SOHO    SQUARE,    LONDON,    W. 


BOORS    FOR    ANGLERS—  Continued. 

THE  PRACTICAL  ANGLER; 


NEW  EMTIOK.   CONTAININO  AN  IlmoDOC. 


Large  Crow  n  8vo,  Cloth.  , 

}'.v  W.  C.  STEWART.  J 

Evening  Standard.  —  "  With  excellent  introduction  and  notes,  and  the  valuable  coloured  facsimile  of  Stewart's  flies 
supplied  in  a  pocket  at  the  end,  it  is  a  mighty  pleasant  volume  to  handle  and  to  possess." 

Westminster  Gazette.  —  "  It  was  a  happy  idea  for  Messrs.  A.  S:  C.  Black  to  produce  a  new  edition  of  this  work.  We 
are  sure  it  will  receive  a  wide  and  cordial  welcome." 


THE  BOOK  OF 
THE  DRY  FLY 

BY  GEORGE 
A.  B.  DEWAR. 

NEW     EDITION,       CONTAINING     8     FULL-PAGE 

ILLUSTRATIONS   IN  COLOUR        Large  Crown 
Svo,  Cloth,  Gilt  top. 

Price 
7s.  6d. 
net. 

/>!'  Post 

7s.  lOd. 

County  Gentleman. — "A  book  of  keen  insight  and  wide  observation  in  regard  to  the  trout  and  the  modern  art  of 
capturing  him.  Mr.  Dewar  is  always  interesting,  and  knows  his  subject  too  well  to  be  obtrusively  dogmatic." 

Illustrated  Sporting  and  Dramatic  News. — ''Mr.  Dewar  is  a  pleasant  and  for  the  most  part  an  authoritative  writer  ; 
he  is  to  be  read  with  pleasure  and  with  profit." 

DRY-FLY  FISHING  Price 

IK!     RHRRPR    WATFRQ          WI™   AN    INTKODUCT10X   BY  J-    CUTHBERT  2s.  6d. 

DUnUCIt     WHICnO  HADDEN.  Large  Crown  Svo,  Cloth,  Illustrated.  rr, 

BY  F.   FERNIE,  A.M.I. C.E.  2      lOd 

Hawick  Express. — "  This  is  a  delightful  volume.  .  .  .  Altogether  it  is  a  well-written  thesis,  with  an  excellently  written 
and  racy  introduction,  and  is  well  printed  and  neatly  bound.  We  have  perused  it  with  interest,  and  will  return  to  it  again  and 
again,  and  when  unable  to  enjoy  thf>  pleasures  of  a  day  by  burn  or  stream  will  taste  afresh  of  its  contents." 

Aberdeen   Daily  Journal.  — "  The  book  is  a  welcome  and  useful  addition  to  the  angler's  library." 


SEA  FISHING 

BY  C.  O.  MINCHIN. 

WITH      32      ILLUSTRATIONS      IN      THE      TEXT, 
MOSTLY    FROM    ORIGINAL   SKETCHES    BY    J.    A. 

MINCHIN.  Large  Crown  8vo,  Cloth,  Illustrated. 

Price 
3s.  6d. 

net. 

By  Post 
3s.  lOd. 

Spectator. — "A  very  instructive,  readable  volume  with  information  abreast  of  modern  knowledge. " 

Daily  Express. — "  Should  appeal  to  all  lovers  of  the  sport,  for  it  is  written  with  sound  knowledge,  and  though  it  affords 
easy  enough  reading,  is  a  practical  treatise  that  says  all  that  need  be  said." 


THE  ART  OF  WORM-FISHING 

A   PRACTICAL   TREATISE   OX  ILLUSTRATED    WITH    1  IAGRAMS.  1S.    6d. 

CLEAR-WATER  WORMING.  Large  Crown  Svo,  Cloth.  „"?*' 

Bv  Post 
BY  ALEXANDER  MACKIE,  M.A.  fs,  9d. 

Angler's  News  and  Sea  Fisher's  Journal. — "  The  book  is  welcome,  and  it  is  doubly  welcome  when  we  read 
the  chapters  and  realise  that  the  author  knows  quite  we'll  what  he  is  writing  about.  .  .  .  The  book  altogether  is  well  written, 
and  must  be  regarded  as  a  valuable  addition  to  piscatorial  literature." 

The  Times  (Literary  Supplement).  — "  His  book  is  full  of  good  hints,  and  makes  pleasant  reading." 


COARSE  FISHING 

OS. 

BY  H.  T.  SHERINGHAM,  Large  Crown  Svo,  Cloth,  Illustrated.  net. 

AUTHOR   OF  By  Post 

"AN    OI'EN    CREEL,"    ETC.  Js> 


This  volume,  by  the  Angling  Editor  of  The  Field,  will  deal  with  Coarse  Fishing  in  a  practical  way,  though  sight  will  not  be 
lost  of  the  fact  that  readers  like  to  be  amused  as  well  as  instructed,  and  that  a  book  of  reference  need  not  necessarily  be  a  bag  of 
dry  bones.  The  more  conventional  modes  of  catching  the  different  kinds  of  fish  that  are  called  coarse  fish  will  be  adequately 
treated,  but  special  attention  will  be  paid  to  some  les:.-practised  forms  of  angling  which  are  entitled  to  rank  as  high  art.  A 
special  section  will  be  devoted  to  fly-fishing  for  chub,  dace,  and  the  other  fish  that  respond  to  that  method  of  attack. 

PUBLISHED    BY    A.    &     C.    BLACK,    4,    5,   &    6    SOHO    SQUARE,    LONDON,    W.